Brother Mfc 9325Cw Owner S Manual

Brother-Mfc-9125Cn-Owner-S-Manual brother-mfc-9125cn-owner-s-manual

MFC-9325CW en-US%5CMFC%5CConsumer%5CUsersManual%5CUM_MFC_9125CN_9325CW_EN_5693

2014-07-05

: Brother Brother-Mfc-9325Cw-Owner-S-Manual brother-mfc-9325cw-owner-s-manual brother pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 267 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

USER’S GUIDE MFC-9125CN MFC-9325CW

USER’S GUIDE

MFC-9125CN

MFC-9325CW

Version 0

USA/CAN

If you need to call Customer Service

Please complete the following information for future

reference:

Model Number: MFC-9125CN and MFC-9325CW

(Circle your model number)

Serial Number: 1

Date of Purchase:

Place of Purchase:

1The serial number is on the back of the unit. Retain

this User’s Guide with your sales receipt as a

permanent record of your purchase, in the event of

theft, fire or warranty service.

http://www.brother.com/registration/

By registering your product with Brother, you will be recorded as the

original owner of the product. Your registration with Brother:

may serve as confirmation of the purchase date of your product

should you lose your receipt;

may support an insurance claim by you in the event of product loss

covered by insurance; and,

will help us notify you of enhancements to your product and special

offers.

The most convenient and efficient way to register your new product is

online at http://www.brother.com/registration/

Brother numbers

IMPORTANT

For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be

made from within that country.

By registering your product with Brother International Corporation, you will be recorded as the

original owner of the product. Your registration with Brother:

may serve as confirmation of the purchase date of your product should you lose your receipt;

may support an insurance claim by you in the event of product loss covered by insurance; and,

will help us notify you of enhancements to your product and special offers.

Please complete and fax the Brother Warranty Registration and Test Sheet or, for your

convenience and most efficient way to register your new product, register on-line at

http://www.brother.com/registration/

FAQs (frequently asked questions)

The Brother Solutions Center is our one-stop resource for all your Fax Machine/Multi-Function

Center needs. You can download the latest software and utilities and read FAQs and

troubleshooting tips to learn how to get the most from your Brother product.

http://solutions.brother.com/

Note

You can check here for Brother driver updates.

To keep your machine’s performance up to date, check here for the latest firmware upgrade

(Windows®).

For Customer Service

Service Center Locator (USA only)

For the location of a Brother authorized service center, call 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437).

Service Center Locations (Canada only)

For the location of a Brother authorized service center, call 1-877-BROTHER.

In USA: 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)

1-901-379-1215 (fax)

In Canada: 1-877-BROTHER

(514) 685-4898 (fax)

Ordering accessories and supplies

For best quality results use only genuine Brother accessories, which are available at most Brother

retailers. If you cannot find the accessory you need and you have a Visa, MasterCard, Discover, or

American Express credit card, you can order accessories directly from Brother. (You can visit us online

for a complete selection of the Brother accessories and supplies that are available for purchase.)

Note

In Canada, only Visa and MasterCard are accepted.

1A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.

2Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

31 page per job.

4Drum life is approximate and may vary by type of use.

In USA: 1-877-552-MALL (1-877-552-6255)

1-800-947-1445 (fax)

http://www.brothermall.com/

In Canada: 1-877-BROTHER

http://www.brother.ca/

Description Item

Toner Cartridge <Black> TN-210BK (Approx. 2,200 pages) 12

Toner Cartridge <Cyan> TN-210C (Approx. 1,400 pages) 12

Toner Cartridge <Magenta> TN-210M (Approx. 1,400 pages) 12

Toner Cartridge <Yellow> TN-210Y (Approx. 1,400 pages) 12

4 pcs. Drum Unit DR-210CL (Approx. 15,000 pages ea. drum unit) 134

1 pc. Drum Unit <Black> DR-210CL-BK (Approx. 15,000 pages ea.) 134

1 pc. Drum Unit <Color> DR-210CL-CMY (Approx. 15,000 pages ea.) 134

Waste Toner Box WT-200CL (Approx. 50,000 pages) 1

Belt Unit BU-200CL (Approx. 50,000 pages) 1

Telephone Line Cord LG3077001

User’s Guide LS8782001 (English for USA and Canada)

LS8782002 (French for Canada)

Quick Setup Guide (MFC-9125CN) LS8783001 (English for USA and Canada)

(MFC-9325CW) LS8795001 (English for USA and Canada)

(MFC-9125CN) LS8783002 (French for Canada)

(MFC-9325CW) LS8795002 (French for Canada)

iii

Notice - Disclaimer of Warranties

(USA and Canada)

BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S), AND THEIR DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR

AGENTS (COLLECTIVELY BROTHER’S LICENSOR) MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE

SOFTWARE. BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S) DOES NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE OR MAKE

ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE

SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, CURRENTNESS

OR OTHERWISE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE

SOFTWARE IS ASSUMED BY YOU. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS NOT

PERMITTED BY SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN CANADA. THE

ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

IN NO EVENT WILL BROTHER’S LICENSOR(S) BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY

CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR

LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS

INFORMATION, AND THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE

SOFTWARE EVEN IF BROTHER’S LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF

SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES IN THE USA AND SOME PROVINCES IN

CANADA DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR

CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY

TO YOU. IN ANY EVENT BROTHER’S LICENSOR’S LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ACTUAL

DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, AND REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE

ACTION (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT

LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE), WILL BE LIMITED TO $50.

Compilation and Publication Notice

Under the supervision of Brother Industries Ltd., this manual has been compiled and published,

covering the latest product descriptions and specifications.

The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are subject to change without

notice.

Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications and materials

contained herein and shall not be responsible for any damages (including consequential) caused

by reliance on the materials presented, including but not limited to typographical and other errors

relating to the publication.

Brother™ Digital Color One-Year Limited Warranty and

Replacement Service (USA Only)

Who is covered:



This limited warranty (“warranty”) is given

only to the original end-user/retail purchaser

(referred to in this warranty as “Original

Purchaser”) of the accompanying product,

consumables and accessories (collectively

referred to in this warranty as “this Product”).

If you purchased a product from someone

other than an authorized Brother reseller in

the United States or if the product was used

(including but not limited to floor models or

refurbished product by someone other than

Brother), prior to your purchase you are not

the Original Purchaser and the product that

you purchased is not covered by this

warranty.

What is covered:



This Product includes a Machine and

Consumable and Accessory Items.

Consumable and Accessory Items include

but are not limited to Toner Cartridges, Drum

Units, Belt Unit, and Waste Toner Box.

Except as otherwise provided herein,

Brother warrants that the Machine and the

accompanying Consumable and

Accessory Items will be free from defects in

materials and workmanship, when used

under normal conditions.

This warranty applies only to products

purchased and used in the United States.

For products purchased in, but used

outside, the United States, this warranty

covers only warranty service within the

United States (and does not include

shipping outside the United States).

What is the length of the Warranty Periods:

Machines: one year from the original

purchase date.



Accompanying Consumable and Accessory

Items: 90 days from the original purchase

date or the rated life of consumable,

whichever comes first.

What is NOT covered:

This warranty does not cover:

1 Physical damage to this Product;

2 Damage caused by improper installation,

improper or abnormal use, misuse, neglect

or accident (including but not limited to

transporting this Product without the proper

preparation and/or packaging);

3 Damage caused by another device or

software used with this Product (including

but not limited to damage resulting from

use of non Brother™-brand parts and

Consumable and Accessory Items);

4 Consumable and Accessory Items that

expired in accordance with a rated life;

5 Problems arising from other than defects in

materials or workmanship; and,

6 Normal Periodic Maintenance Items, such

as Paper Feeding Kit and Fuser Unit.

This limited warranty is VOID if this Product

has been altered or modified in any way

(including but not limited to attempted warranty

repair without authorization from Brother

and/or alteration/removal of the serial

number).

What to do if you think your Product is

eligible for warranty service:

Report your issue to either our Customer

Service Hotline at 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-

276-8437) or to a Brother Authorized Service

Center within the applicable warranty

period. Supply Brother or the Brother

Authorized Service Center with a copy of your

dated bill of sale showing that this Product was

purchased within the U.S. For the name of

local Brother Authorized Service Center(s),

call 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) or

visit www.brother-usa.com.

What Brother will ask you to do:

After contacting Brother or a Brother

Authorized Service Center, you may be

required to deliver (by hand if you prefer) or

send the Product properly packaged, freight

prepaid, to the Authorized Service Center

together with a photocopy of your bill of sale.

You are responsible for the cost of

shipping, packing product, and insurance

(if you desire). You are also responsible for

loss or damage to this Product in shipping,

so we would recommend that you insure

your product.

What Brother will do:

If the problem reported concerning your

Machine and/or accompanying Consumable

and Accessory Items is covered by this

warranty and if you first reported the problem

to Brother or an Authorized Service Center

within the applicable warranty period, Brother

or its Authorized Service Center will repair or

replace the Machine and/or accompanying

Consumable and Accessory Items at no

charge to you for parts or labor. The decision

as to whether to repair or replace the Machine

and/or accompanying Consumable and

Accessory Items is made by Brother in its sole

discretion. Brother reserves the right to supply

a refurbished or remanufactured replacement

Brother™ Digital Color One-Year Limited Warranty and

Replacement Service (USA Only)

Machine and/or accompanying Consumable

and Accessory Items and use refurbished

parts provided such replacement products

conform to the manufacturer’s specifications

for new product/parts. The repaired or

replacement Machine and/or accompanying

Consumable and Accessory Items will be

returned to you freight prepaid or made

available for you to pick up at a conveniently

located Authorized Service Center.

If the Machine and/or accompanying

Consumable and Accessory Items are not

covered by this warranty (either stage), you

will be charged for shipping the Machine

and/or accompanying Consumable and

Accessory Items back to you and charged for

any service and/or replacement parts/products

at Brother’s then current published rates.

The foregoing are your sole (i.e., only) and

exclusive remedies under this warranty.

What happens when Brother elects to

replace your Machine:

When a replacement Machine is authorized by

Brother, and you have delivered the Machine

to an Authorized Service Center, the

Authorized Service Center will provide you

with a replacement Machine after receiving

one from Brother. If you are dealing directly

with Brother’s Express Exchange Service

Brother will send to you a replacement

Machine shipped for receipt within two

business days, with the understanding that

you will, after receipt of the replacement

Machine, supply the required proof of

purchase information, together with the

Machine that Brother agreed to replace. You

are then expected to pack the Machine that

Brother agreed to replace in the package from

the replacement Machine and return it to

Brother using the pre-paid freight bill supplied

by Brother in accordance with the instructions

provided by Brother. Since you will be in

possession of two machines, Brother will

require that you provide a valid major credit

card number. Brother will issue a hold against

the credit card account number that you

provide until Brother receives your original

Product and determines that your original

Product is entitled to warranty coverage. Your

credit card will be charged up to the cost of a

new Product only if: (i) you do not return your

original Product to Brother within five (5)

business days; (ii) the problems with your

original Product are not covered by the limited

warranty; (iii) the proper packaging

instructions are not followed and has caused

damage to the product; or (iv) the warranty

period on your original Product has expired or

has not been sufficiently validated with a copy

of the proof of purchase (bill of sale). The

replacement Machine you receive (even if

refurbished or remanufactured) will be

covered by the balance of the limited warranty

period remaining on the original Product, plus

an additional thirty (30) days. You will keep the

replacement Machine that is sent to you and

your original Machine shall become the

property of Brother. Retain your original

Accessory Items and a copy of the return

freight bill, signed by the courier.

Limitations:

Brother is not responsible for damage to or

loss of any equipment, media, programs or

data related to the use of this Product. Except

for the repair or replacement as described

above, Brother shall not be liable for any

direct, indirect, incidental or consequential

damages or specific relief. Because some

states do not allow the exclusion or limitation

of consequential or incidental damages, the

above limitation may not apply to you.

THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL

OTHER WARRANTIES, WRITTEN OR

ORAL, WHETHER EXPRESSED BY

AFFIRMATION, PROMISE, DESCRIPTION,

DRAWING, MODEL OR SAMPLE. ANY AND

ALL WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THIS

ONE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY

DISCLAIMED.

This Limited Warranty is the only warranty

that Brother is giving for this Product. It is

the final expression and the exclusive and

only statement of Brother’s obligations to

you. It replaces all other agreements and

understandings that you may have with

Brother or its representatives.

This warranty gives you certain rights and

you may also have other rights that may

vary from state to state.

This Limited Warranty (and Brother’s

obligation to you) may not be changed in

any way unless you and Brother sign the

same piece of paper in which we (1) refer

to this Product and your bill of sale date, (2)

describe the change to this warranty and

(3) agree to make that change.

Important: We recommend that you keep all

original packing materials, in the event that

you ship this Product

BROTHER MULTIFUNCTION CENTER / FAX MACHINE

LIMITED WARRANTY

(Canada only)

Pursuant to the limited warranty of 1 year from the date of purchase for labour and parts, Brother

International Corporation (Canada) Ltd. (“Brother”), or its Authorized Service Centres, will repair or

replace (at Brother’s sole discretion) this MFC/Fax machine free of charge if defective in material or

workmanship. This warranty applies only to products purchased and used in Canada.

This limited Warranty does not include cleaning, consumables (including, without limitation, ink cartridges, print

cartridges, print rolls, thermal paper rolls, toner cartridges, drum units, OPC belts, fixing units, print heads, paper

feed rollers, transfer rolls, cleaning rollers, waste toner packs, oil bottles) or damage caused by accident, neglect,

misuse or improper installation or operation, any damage caused from service, maintenance, modifications, or

tampering by anyone other than a Brother Authorized Service Representative, or if shipped out of the country.

The use of supplies or consumable items that are non-Brother products may void your warranty. This

limited warranty ceases when this machine is rented, sold, or otherwise disposed of. Operation of the

MFC/Fax machine in excess of the specifications or with the Serial Number or Rating Label removed

shall be deemed abuse and all repairs thereafter shall be the sole liability of the end-user/purchaser.

In order to obtain warranty service, the MFC/Fax machine must be delivered or shipped freight prepaid

by the end-user/purchaser to a “Brother” Authorized Service Centre, together with your Canadian Proof

of Purchase in the form of a Sales Receipt.

When shipping or transporting your MFC/Fax machine, please refer to your Operation Manual for the

proper packaging procedures.

For Laser and LED units: Failure to remove the Toner Cartridge (and Toner Drum Unit, waste toner

packs or oil bottles on applicable models) during shipping or transport will cause severe damage to the

Laser MFC/Fax machine and will void the Warranty.

For inkjet units: (When shipping your Inkjet MFC/Fax machine remove the ink cartridges and replace them with

the original protective parts. If original protective parts are not available, leave ink cartridges installed. Please

avoid shipping the unit without original protective parts or ink cartridges.) Damage to your print head resulting from

packing the Inkjet MFC/Fax machine without the ink cartridges or the protective parts will void your warranty.

Improper packaging may cause severe damage to the machine during shipping and will void the

warranty.

BROTHER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING,

WITHOUT LIMITATIONS, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT ANY WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY LAW

CANNOT BE VALIDLY WAIVED.

No oral or written information, advice or representation provided by Brother, its Authorized Service

Centres, Distributors, Dealers, Agents or employees, shall create another warranty or modify this

warranty. The warranty states Brother’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy against Brother for any

failure of the MFC/Fax machine to operate properly.

Neither Brother nor anyone else involved in the development, production, or delivery of this MFC/Fax

machine shall be liable for any indirect, incidental, special, consequential, exemplary, or punitive

damages, including lost profits, arising from the use of or inability to use the product, even if advised by

the end user/purchaser of the possibility of such damages. Since some Provinces do not allow the

above limitation of liability, such limitation, may not apply to you.

This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may

also have other rights which vary from Province to Province.

Warranty Service is available at Brother Authorized Service Centres

throughout Canada. For Technical Assistance or for the name and

location of your nearest Authorized Service Centre call 1-877-BROTHER.

Internet support: support@brother.ca or browse Brother’s Web Site www.brother.ca.

vii

Table of Contents

Section I General

1 General information 2

Using the documentation.......................................................................................2

Symbols and conventions used in the documentation ....................................2

Accessing the Software User’s Guide and Network User’s Guide ........................3

Viewing documentation ...................................................................................3

Accessing Brother support (Windows®) ................................................................5

Control panel overview ..........................................................................................6

Data LED indications .....................................................................................10

2 Loading paper and documents 11

Loading paper and print media............................................................................11

Loading paper in the standard paper tray......................................................11

Loading paper in the manual feed slot ..........................................................13

Unprintable area............................................................................................17

Acceptable paper and other print media..............................................................18

Recommended paper and print media ..........................................................18

Type and size of paper ..................................................................................18

Handling and using special paper .................................................................20

Loading documents .............................................................................................23

Using the automatic document feeder (ADF) ................................................23

Using the scanner glass ................................................................................24

3 General Setup 25

Mode Timer..........................................................................................................25

Paper settings......................................................................................................25

Paper Type....................................................................................................25

Paper Size.....................................................................................................25

Volume settings ...................................................................................................26

Ring volume...................................................................................................26

Beeper volume ..............................................................................................26

Speaker volume.............................................................................................26

Automatic daylight savings time ..........................................................................27

Ecology features..................................................................................................27

Toner Save ....................................................................................................27

Sleep Time ....................................................................................................27

LCD Contrast.......................................................................................................28

Dial Prefix ............................................................................................................28

Setting up the prefix number .........................................................................28

Changing the prefix number ..........................................................................28

viii

4 Security features 29

Secure Function Lock 2.0 (MFC-9325CW only) ..................................................29

Setting the password for the administrator ...................................................29

Changing the password for the administrator................................................30

Setting up the public user mode ....................................................................30

Setting up restricted users.............................................................................31

Turning Secure Function Lock on/off.............................................................31

Switching Users.............................................................................................32

Memory Security (MFC-9125CN only).................................................................32

Setting up the password ...............................................................................33

Changing your memory security password ...................................................33

Turning memory security on/off .....................................................................33

Setting Lock .........................................................................................................34

Setting up the password ................................................................................34

Changing your Setting Lock password ..........................................................34

Turning Setting Lock on/off............................................................................35

Restricting dialing ................................................................................................35

Dial pad restriction.........................................................................................35

One Touch restriction ....................................................................................35

Speed Dial restriction ....................................................................................36

Section II Fax

5 Sending a fax 38

How to fax............................................................................................................38

Entering fax mode .........................................................................................38

Sending a fax from the ADF ..........................................................................38

Sending a fax from the scanner glass ...........................................................38

Faxing A4 size documents from the scanner glass .......................................39

Canceling a fax in progress ...........................................................................39

Broadcasting (black & white only)........................................................................39

Canceling a Broadcast in progress................................................................40

Additional sending operations..............................................................................40

Sending faxes using multiple settings ...........................................................40

Electronic cover page (black & white only)....................................................41

Contrast .........................................................................................................42

Changing Fax Resolution ..............................................................................42

Dual access (black & white only)...................................................................43

Real Time Transmission................................................................................43

Overseas Mode .............................................................................................44

Delayed Fax (black & white only) ..................................................................44

Delayed batch transmission (black & white only) ..........................................44

Checking and canceling waiting jobs.............................................................45

Sending a fax manually .................................................................................45

Sending a fax at the end of a conversation ...................................................45

Out of memory message ...............................................................................45

6 Receiving a fax 46

Choose the correct Receive Mode ......................................................................46

Using receive modes ...........................................................................................48

Fax Only ........................................................................................................48

Fax/Tel...........................................................................................................48

Manual...........................................................................................................48

External TAD .................................................................................................48

Receive Mode settings ........................................................................................49

Ring Delay .....................................................................................................49

F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)...............................................................49

Easy Receive.................................................................................................50

Setting the Print Density................................................................................50

Additional receiving operations............................................................................51

Printing a reduced incoming fax ....................................................................51

Setting the Fax Receive Stamp (black & white only).....................................51

Receiving a fax at the end of a conversation.................................................51

Printing a fax from the memory .....................................................................52

Receiving faxes into memory when the paper tray is empty

(black & white only) ...................................................................................52

7 Telephone services and external devices 53

Telephone line services.......................................................................................53

Voice Mail......................................................................................................53

Distinctive Ring..............................................................................................54

Caller ID ........................................................................................................56

Connecting an external TAD (telephone answering device)................................57

Connections...................................................................................................58

Recording an outgoing message (OGM).......................................................58

Special line considerations ............................................................................59

Multi-line connections (PBX) .........................................................................60

External and extension telephones......................................................................60

Using external and extension telephones .....................................................60

For Fax/Tel mode only...................................................................................61

Connecting an external or extension telephone ............................................61

Using a non-Brother cordless external handset ............................................61

Using Remote Codes ....................................................................................61

8 Dialing and storing numbers 63

How to dial ...........................................................................................................63

Manual dialing ...............................................................................................63

One touch dialing...........................................................................................63

Speed dialing.................................................................................................63

Search ...........................................................................................................64

Fax redial.......................................................................................................64

Storing numbers ..................................................................................................64

Storing a pause .............................................................................................64

Storing One Touch Dial numbers ..................................................................65

Storing Speed Dial numbers..........................................................................66

Changing One Touch and Speed Dial numbers............................................68

Setting up Groups for Broadcasting ..............................................................69

Dialing access codes and credit card numbers .............................................71

Pause ............................................................................................................71

Tone or Pulse (Canada only).........................................................................71

9 Remote Fax Options

(black & white only) 72

Fax Forwarding....................................................................................................72

Paging..................................................................................................................73

Fax Storage .........................................................................................................73

PC Fax Receive...................................................................................................74

Changing Remote Fax Options ...........................................................................75

Turning off Remote Fax Options ...................................................................75

Remote retrieval ..................................................................................................76

Setting a Remote Access Code.....................................................................76

Using your Remote Access Code..................................................................76

Retrieving fax messages ...............................................................................77

Changing the Fax Forwarding number ..........................................................77

Remote fax commands........................................................................................78

10 Polling 79

Polling receive .....................................................................................................79

Sequential polling ..........................................................................................79

Polled transmit (black & white only).....................................................................80

Setup for polled transmit................................................................................80

11 Printing reports 81

Fax reports...........................................................................................................81

Transmission verification report.....................................................................81

Fax Journal....................................................................................................82

Reports ................................................................................................................82

How to print a report ......................................................................................83

Section III Copy

12 Making copies 86

How to copy.........................................................................................................86

Entering copy mode.......................................................................................86

Making a single copy .....................................................................................86

Making multiple copies ..................................................................................86

Stop copying..................................................................................................86

Copy options (temporary settings).......................................................................87

Enlarging or reducing the image copied ........................................................87

Using the Options key ...................................................................................88

Improving copy quality...................................................................................89

Sorting copies using the ADF........................................................................89

Adjusting Contrast, Color and Brightness......................................................89

Making N in 1 copies (page layout) ...............................................................91

Out of memory message .....................................................................................92

Section IV Direct printing

13 Printing photos from a digital camera (MFC-9325CW only) 94

Before using PictBridge .......................................................................................94

PictBridge requirements ................................................................................94

Using PictBridge ..................................................................................................94

Setting your digital camera ............................................................................94

Printing images....................................................................................................95

DPOF printing................................................................................................96

Printing images with Secure Function Lock 2.0 enabled (MFC-9325CW only)...96

Connecting a camera as a storage device ..........................................................98

Understanding the error messages .....................................................................98

14 Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive

(MFC-9325CW only) 99

Supported file formats..........................................................................................99

Creating a PRN or PostScript® 3™ file for direct printing....................................99

Printing data directly from the USB Flash memory drive (MFC-9325CW only).100

Printing data directly from the USB flash memory drive with Secure Function

Lock 2.0 enabled (MFC-9325CW only) ..........................................................101

Understanding the error messages ...................................................................103

xii

Section V Software

15 Software and Network features 106

Section VI Appendixes

A Safety and legal 108

Compilation and Publication ..............................................................................108

Choosing a location ...........................................................................................108

To use the product safely ..................................................................................111

Important safety instructions........................................................................117

Regulation..........................................................................................................118

Standard telephone and FCC notices .........................................................118

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of Conformity

(USA only) ...............................................................................................119

Industry Canada Compliance Statement (Canada only) .............................120

EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT LIMITATIONS (Canada only).......................121

For use in the USA or Canada only.............................................................121

Disconnect device .......................................................................................121

LAN connection ...........................................................................................121

International ENERGY STAR® Qualification Statement..............................122

Trademarks........................................................................................................123

Open Source Licensing Remarks ......................................................................123

Legal limitations for copying ..............................................................................124

B Options 125

Options ..............................................................................................................125

Memory board....................................................................................................126

Installing extra memory ...............................................................................126

C Troubleshooting and routine maintenance 128

Troubleshooting .................................................................................................128

If you are having difficulty with your machine ..............................................128

Improving the print quality ...........................................................................136

Setting Dial Tone detection .........................................................................143

Telephone line interference/VoIP ................................................................143

Error and maintenance messages.....................................................................144

Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal report .............................................150

Document jams............................................................................................151

Paper jams ..................................................................................................152

Routine maintenance.........................................................................................157

Cleaning the outside of the machine ...........................................................157

Cleaning the scanner...................................................................................158

Cleaning the LED heads..............................................................................159

Cleaning the corona wires ...........................................................................160

Cleaning the drum unit ................................................................................162

xiii

Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers...............................................................166

Calibration ...................................................................................................167

Auto Registration .........................................................................................168

Manual Registration.....................................................................................168

Frequency (Color Correction) ......................................................................168

Replacing the consumable items.......................................................................169

Replacing a Toner cartridge ........................................................................171

Drum units ...................................................................................................176

Replacing the belt unit.................................................................................181

Replacing the waste toner box ....................................................................185

Replacing periodic maintenance parts...............................................................190

Machine Information ..........................................................................................190

Checking the Serial Number........................................................................190

Checking the Page Counters.......................................................................190

Checking the remaining life of parts ............................................................191

Reset functions............................................................................................191

How to reset the machine............................................................................192

Packing and shipping the machine....................................................................192

D Menu and features 197

On-screen programming....................................................................................197

Menu table...................................................................................................197

Memory storage...........................................................................................197

Menu keys .........................................................................................................197

How to access the menu mode ...................................................................198

Menu table.........................................................................................................199

Entering text ......................................................................................................219

E Specifications 221

General..............................................................................................................221

Print media.........................................................................................................223

Fax.....................................................................................................................224

Copy ..................................................................................................................225

Scan ..................................................................................................................226

Print ...................................................................................................................227

Interfaces...........................................................................................................228

PictBridge (MFC-9325CW)................................................................................229

Direct Print feature (MFC-9325CW) ..................................................................230

Computer requirements ....................................................................................231

Consumable items.............................................................................................232

Ethernet wired network......................................................................................233

Ethernet wireless network (MFC-9325CW) .......................................................235

Authentication and encryption for wireless users only.................................237

Wireless one-push configuration .................................................................239

F Glossary 240

G Index 244

xiv

Section I

General I

General information 2

Loading paper and documents 11

General Setup 25

Security features 29

Using the

documentation 1

Thank you for buying a Brother machine!

Reading the documentation will help you

make the most of your machine.

Symbols and conventions

used in the documentation 1

The following symbols and conventions are

used throughout the documentation.

Follow all warnings and instructions marked

on the product.

General information 1

Bold Bold typeface identifies specific

keys on the product’s control

panel or on the computer

screen.

Italics Italicized typeface emphasizes

an important point or refers you

to a related topic.

Courier

New

Text in Courier New font

identifies messages on the

LCD of the product.

WARNING

WARNING indicates a potentially

hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

could result in death or serious injuries.

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous

situation which, if not avoided, may result in

minor or moderate injuries.

IMPORTANT

IMPORTANT indicates a potentially

hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

may result in damage to property or loss of

product functionality.

Electrical Hazard icons alert you to

possible electrical shock.

Improper Setup icons alert you to

devices and operations that are not

compatible with the product.

Hot Surface icons warn you not to

touch product parts that are hot.

Fire Hazard icons alert you to the

possibility of fire.

Notes tell you how you should

respond to a situation that may arise

or give tips about how the operation

works with other features.

General information

Accessing the

Software User’s Guide

and Network User’s

Guide 1

This User’s Guide does not contain all the

information about the machine such as how

to use the advanced features of Fax, Printer,

Scanner, PC Fax and Network. When you are

ready to learn detailed information about

these operations, read the Software User’s

Guide and Network User’s Guide.

Viewing documentation 1

Viewing documentation (Windows®)1

To view the documentation, from the Start

menu, select Brother, MFC-XXXX (where

XXXX is your model name) from the

programs group, and then choose User’s

Guides in PDF format.

If you have not installed the software, you can

find the documentation by following the

instructions below:

aTurn on your PC.

Insert the Brother CD-ROM into your

CD-ROM drive.

bIf the language selection screen

appears, click your language.

cIf the model name screen appears, click

your model name. The CD-ROM main

menu will appear.

If this window does not appear, use

Windows® Explorer to find and run the

start.exe program from the root directory

of the Brother CD-ROM.

dClick Documentation.

eClick the documentation you want to

read:

User’s Guide for stand-alone

operations, Software User’s Guide,

Network User’s Guide and Quick

Setup Guide.

Chapter 1

How to find scanning instructions 1

There are several ways you can scan

documents. You can find the instructions as

follows:

Software User’s Guide: 1

Scanning a document using the TWAIN

driver in Chapter 2

Scanning a document using the WIA

driver (Windows® XP/Windows

Vista®/Windows® 7) in Chapter 2

Using ControlCenter3 in Chapter 3

Network Scanning in Chapter 12

ScanSoft™ PaperPort™ 11SE with

OCR How-to-Guides: 1

The complete ScanSoft™

PaperPort™ 11SE with OCR

How-to-Guides can be viewed from the

Help selection in the ScanSoft™

PaperPort™ 11SE application.

How to find Network setup

instructions 1

Your machine can be connected to a wireless

or wired network. You can find basic setup

instructions in the Quick Setup Guide. If your

wireless access point supports Wi-Fi

Protected Setup or AOSS™, follow the steps

in the Quick Setup Guide. For more

information about network setup please see

the Network User's Guide.

Viewing documentation (Macintosh) 1

aTurn on your Macintosh.

Insert the Brother CD-ROM into your

CD-ROM drive.

bThe following window will appear.

cDouble-click the Documentation icon.

dIf the language selection screen

appears, double-click your language.

eDouble-click the documentation you

want to read:

User's Guide for stand-alone

operations, Software User's Guide and

Network User's Guide.

How to find scanning instructions 1

There are several ways you can scan

documents. You can find the instructions as

follows:

Software User’s Guide: 1

Scanning in Chapter 8

Using ControlCenter2 in Chapter 9

Network Scanning in Chapter 12

General information

Presto! PageManager User’s Guide: 1

Note

Presto! PageManager is available as a

download from

http://nj.newsoft.com.tw/download/brother/

PM9SEInstaller_BR_multilang.dmg

The complete Presto! PageManager

User’s Guide can be viewed from the Help

selection in the Presto! PageManager

application.

How to find Network setup

instructions 1

Your machine can be connected to a wireless

or wired network. You can find basic setup

instructions in the Quick Setup Guide. If your

wireless access point supports Wi-Fi

Protected Setup or AOSS™, follow the steps

in the Quick Setup Guide. For more

information about network setup please see

the Network User's Guide.

Viewing the Mobile Print/Scan Guide

documentation 1

This Guide provides useful information about

printing JPEG and PDF files from your mobile

device and scanning from your Brother

machine to your mobile device when

connected on a WiFi network.

You can find the documentation at the

Brother Solutions Center at

http://solutions.brother.com/.

Accessing Brother

support (Windows®)1

You can find all the contacts you will need,

such as Web support (Brother Solutions

Center), Customer Service and Brother

Authorized Service Centers on page i and on

the Brother CD-ROM.

Click Brother Support on the main menu.

The following screen will appear:

To access our web site

(http://www.brother.com/) clicks

Brother Home Page.

To view all Brother Numbers, including

Customer Service numbers for the USA

and Canada, click Support Information.

To access the USA Brother online

shopping mall

(http://www.brothermall.com/) for

additional product and service

information, click Brother Mall.com.

To access Canada’s Brother online

shopping mall (http://www.brother.ca/) for

additional product and services

information, click Shop Online (Canada).

For the latest news and product support

information

(http://solutions.brother.com/), click

Brother Solutions Center.

To visit our web site for original/genuine

Brother supplies

(http://www.brother.com/original/), click

Supplies Information.

To return to the main page, click Back.

Or, if you have finished, click Exit.

Chapter 1

Control panel overview 1

MFC-9125CN and MFC-9325CW have similar keys.

1234 56

1011

01/07 15:30 Fax

Res:Standard

1234 56

1011

01/07 15:30 Fax

Res:Standard

General information

01/07 15:30 Fax

Res:Standard

34 5 6 7 8

91011

34 5 6 7 8

91011

01/07 15:30 Fax

Res:Standard

Chapter 1

1 One Touch keys

These 4 keys give you instant access to 8

previously stored numbers.

Shift

Lets you access One Touch numbers 5 to 8

when held down.

2 Fax, Copy and Print keys

Fax keys:

Hook

Press before dialing if you want to make sure a

fax machine will answer, and then press

Black Start or Color Start. Also, press this

key after you pick up the handset of an external

telephone during the F/T ring (fast

double-rings).

Redial/Pause

Redials the last number called. It also inserts a

pause when programming quick dial numbers

or when dialing a number manually.

Resolution

Sets the resolution when sending a fax.

Copy keys:

Options

You can quickly and easily choose temporary

settings for copying.

Enlarge/Reduce

Reduces or enlarges copies.

Quality

Lets you change the quality for the next copy.

Print keys:

Direct (MFC-9325CW)

Lets you print data from a USB flash memory

drive that you can connect directly to the

machine. You can also print images directly

from your PictBridge compatible camera.

(See Printing photos from a digital camera

(MFC-9325CW only) on page 94.)

Reports (MFC-9125CN)

Print the Transmission Verification Reports,

Help List, Tel Index List, Fax Journal, User

Settings and Network Config.

Secure

You can print data saved in the memory when

you enter your four-digit password. (For details

about using the Secure key, see the Software

User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

(MFC-9325CW) When using Secure Function

Lock, you can switch restricted users by

holding down Shift as you press Secure. (See

Secure Function Lock 2.0 (MFC-9325CW only)

on page 29.)

Job Cancel

Cancels a programmed print job and clears it

from the machine’s memory. To cancel

multiple print jobs, hold down this key until the

LCD shows Job Cancel (All).

3 Data LED

The LED will flash depending on the machine

status.

4Error LED

Blinks in orange when the LCD displays an

error or an important status message.

5LCD

Displays messages to help you set up and use

your machine.

(MFC-9325CW only) A four level indicator

shows the current wireless signal strength if

you are using a wireless connection.

6 Clear/Back

Deletes entered data or lets you cancel the

current setting.

Lets you store your settings in the machine.

Volume keys:

d or c

Press to scroll backwards or forwards through

menu selections. Press to change the volume

when in fax or standby mode.

a or b

Press to scroll through the menus and options.

Address Book:

Lets you look up numbers that are stored in the

dialing memory. It also lets dial stored numbers

by pressing a three digit number.

0Max

General information

7Dialpad

Use these keys to dial telephone and fax

numbers and as a keyboard for entering

information into the machine.

(Canada only) The # key temporarily switches

the dialing mode from Pulse to Tone during a

telephone call.

8Stop/Exit

Stops an operation or exits from a menu.

9Start:

Color

Lets you start sending faxes or making copies

in full color.

Black

Lets you start sending faxes or making copies

in black & white.

10 Mode keys:

FAX

Puts the machine in Fax mode.

SCAN

Puts the machine in Scan mode.

(For details about scanning, see the Software

User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

COPY

Puts the machine in Copy mode.

11 Menu

Lets you access the Menu to program your

settings in this machine.

Chapter 1

Data LED indications 1

The Data LED (light emitting diode) will flash depending on the machine’s status.

LED Machine Status Description

Ready Mode The machine is ready to print, in sleep mode, there is no print

data, or the power switch is off.

Green

(blinking)

Receiving Data The machine is either receiving data from the computer,

processing data in memory, or printing data.

Green

Data Remaining in

Memory

Print data remains in the machine memory.

Loading paper and

print media 2

The machine can feed paper from the

standard paper tray.

When you put paper into the paper tray, note

the following:

If your application software supports

paper size selection on the print menu,

you can select it through the software. If

your application software does not

support it, you can set the paper size in

the printer driver or by using the control

panel buttons.

Loading paper in the standard

paper tray 2

Printing on plain paper, thin paper or

recycled paper from the paper tray 2

aPull the paper tray completely out of the

machine.

bWhile pressing the green paper-guide

release lever (1), slide the paper guides

to fit the paper size you are loading in

the tray. Make sure that the guides are

firmly in the slots.

Note

For Legal and Folio size paper, press the

release button (1) in the bottom of the

paper tray and then pull out the back of the

paper tray. (Legal or Folio size paper is

not available in some regions.)

Loading paper and documents 2

Chapter 2

cFan the stack of paper well to avoid

paper jams and misfeeds.

dPut paper in the tray, and make sure that

the paper is below the maximum paper

mark (1). The side to be printed on must

be face down.

IMPORTANT

Make sure the paper guides touch the

sides of the paper so it will feed properly.

If you do not do this, it may cause damage

to your machine.

ePut the paper tray firmly back in the

machine. Make sure that it is completely

inserted into the machine.

fLift up the support flap (1) to prevent

paper from sliding off the face-down

output tray or remove each page as

soon as it comes out of the machine.

Loading paper and documents

Loading paper in the manual

feed slot 2

You can load envelopes and special print

media one at a time into this slot. Use the

manual feed slot to print or copy on labels,

envelopes or thicker paper.

Printing on plain paper, recycled

paper or bond paper from the manual

feed slot 2

Before loading, press the corners and sides

of the envelopes to make them as flat as

possible.

Note

The machine automatically turns on the

Manual Feed mode when you put paper in

the manual feed slot.

aLift up the support flap (1) to prevent

paper from sliding off the face-down

output tray or remove each page as

soon as it comes out of the machine.

bOpen the manual feed slot cover.

cUsing both hands, slide the manual feed

slot paper guides to the width of the

paper that you are going to use.

Chapter 2

dUsing both hands, put one piece of

paper in the manual feed slot with the

print side face up until the front edge of

the paper touches the paper feed roller.

Wait until the machine automatically

feeds the paper. When you feel the

machine pull in the paper, let go.

Printing on thick paper, labels,

envelopes or small paper 2

When the back output tray is pulled down, the

machine has a straight paper path from the

manual feed slot through to the back of the

machine. Use this paper output method when

you want to print on thick paper, labels,

envelopes or paper that is smaller than

4.1 5.8 in. (or A6 size).

Note

• Remove each printed sheet or envelope

immediately to prevent a paper jam.

• The machine automatically turns on the

Manual Feed mode when you put paper in

the manual feed slot.

aOpen the back cover (back output tray).

b<For printing envelopes only>

Pull down the two gray levers, one on

the left-hand side and one on the

right-hand side, toward you as shown in

the illustration below.

Loading paper and documents

cOpen the manual feed slot cover.

dUsing both hands, slide the manual feed

slot paper guides to the width of the

paper that you are going to use.

eUsing both hands, put one sheet of

paper or one envelope in the manual

feed slot until the front edge of the paper

or envelope touches the paper feed

roller. When you feel the machine pull in

the paper, let go.

Chapter 2

Note

• Put the paper into the manual feed slot

with the side to be printed face up.

• Make sure that the print media is straight

and in the proper position on the manual

feed slot. If it is not, the paper may not be

fed properly, resulting in a skewed printout

or a paper jam.

• Do not put more than one sheet of paper

in the manual feed slot at any one time, as

it may cause a jam.

• Pull the paper out completely when you

retry putting the paper into the manual

feed.

• If you put paper or other print media in the

manual feed slot before the machine is in

the Ready mode, an error may occur and

the machine will stop printing.

• To easily remove a small printout from the

output tray, lift up the scanner by using

both hands as shown in the illustration.

• You can still use the machine while the

scanner is up. To close the scanner, push

it down with both hands.

• When the top cover is open, you cannot

open the scanner.

Loading paper and documents

Unprintable area 2

Unprintable area for faxes and copies 2

The figures below show unprintable areas.

Note

This unprintable area shown above is for a single copy or a 1 in 1 copy using Letter size paper.

The area that cannot be printed on will vary by paper size.

Unprintable area when printing from a computer 2

When using the printer driver the printable area is smaller than the paper size, as shown below.

Note

The area that cannot be printed on may vary depending on the paper size and the printer driver

you are using. The unprintable area shown above is for Letter size paper.

Usage Document Size Top (1)

Bottom (1)

Left (2)

Right (2)

Fax Letter 0.16 in. (4 mm) 0.15 in. (3.95 mm)

A4 0.16 in. (4 mm) 0.04 in. (1 mm)

Copy Letter 0.16 in. (4 mm) 0.16 in. (4 mm)

A4 0.16 in. (4 mm) 0.12 in. (3 mm)

Portrait Landscape

Windows® printer driver and Macintosh printer driver

BRScript Driver for Windows® and Macintosh

1 0.16 in. (4.23 mm)

2 0.16 in. (4.23 mm)

Chapter 2

Acceptable paper and

other print media 2

Print quality may vary according to the type of

paper you are using.

You can use the following types of print

media: thin paper, plain paper, thick paper,

bond paper, recycled paper, labels or

envelopes.

For best results, follow the instructions below:

Use paper made for plain paper copying.

Use paper that is 20 to 24 lb

(75 to 90 g/m2).

DO NOT put different types of paper in the

paper tray at the same time because it

may cause paper jams or misfeeds.

For proper printing, you must choose the

same paper size from your software

application as the paper in the tray.

Avoid touching the printed surface of the

paper immediately after printing.

Use long grain paper with a neutral Ph

value, and a moisture content of

approx. 5%.

Recommended paper specifications 2

The following paper specifications are suitable for this machine.

Paper size Paper types No. of sheets

Paper Tray A4, Letter, Legal,

Executive, A5, A5 (Long

Edge), A6, B5 (ISO), B6

(ISO) and Folio 1.

Plain paper, Thin paper

and Recycled paper

up to 250

[20lb(80g/m

2)]

Manual feed slot

(Manual Feed)

Width: 3.0 to 8.66 in.

(76.2 to 220 mm)

Length: 4.57 to 16 in.

(116 to 406.4 mm)

Plain paper, Thin paper,

Thick paper, Thicker

paper, Bond paper,

Recycled paper,

Envelopes and Labels.

1 sheet [20 lb (80 g/m2)]

1 Envelope

Basis weight 20-24 lb (75-90 g/m2)

Thickness 80-110 m

Roughness Higher than 20 sec.

Stiffness 90-150 cm3/100

Grain direction Long grain

Volume resistivity 10e9-10e11 ohm

Surface resistivity 10e9-10e12 ohm-cm

Filler CaCO3 (Neutral)

Ash content Below 23 wt%

Brightness Higher than 80%

Opacity Higher than 85%

Chapter 2

Handling and using special

paper 2

The machine is designed to work well with

most types of xerographic and bond paper.

However, some paper variables may have an

effect on print quality or handling reliability.

Always test samples of paper before

purchasing to ensure desirable performance.

Store paper in its original packaging and keep

it sealed. Keep the paper flat and away from

moisture, direct sunlight and heat.

Some important guidelines when selecting

paper are:

DO NOT use inkjet paper because it may

cause a paper jam or damage your

machine.

Preprinted paper must use ink that can

withstand the temperature of the

machine’s fusing process 392 degrees

Fahrenheit (200 degrees centigrade).

If you use bond paper, paper having a

rough surface or paper that is wrinkled or

creased, the paper may exhibit degraded

performance.

Types of paper to avoid 2

IMPORTANT

Some types of paper may not perform well

or may cause damage to your machine.

DO NOT use paper:

• that is highly textured

• that is extremely smooth or shiny

• that is curled or warped

1 0.08 in. (2 mm) or greater curl may

cause jams to occur.

• that is coated or has a chemical finish

• that is damaged, creased or folded

• that exceeds the recommended weight

specification in this guide

• with tabs and staples

• with letterheads using low temperature

dyes or thermography

• that is multipart or carbonless

• that is designed for inkjet printing

If you use any of the types of paper listed

above, they may damage your machine.

This damage is not covered under any

Brother warranty or service agreement.

Loading paper and documents

Envelopes 2

Most envelopes will be suitable for your

machine. However, some envelopes may

have feed and print-quality problems

because of the way they have been made. A

suitable envelope should have edges with

straight, well-creased folds and the leading

edge should not be thicker than two sheets of

paper. The envelope should lie flat and not be

of baggy or flimsy construction. You should

buy quality envelopes from a supplier who

understands that you will be using the

envelopes in a laser machine.

Envelopes can only be fed from the Manual

feed slot. We recommend that you print a test

envelope to make sure the print results are

what you want before you print or purchase a

large quantity of envelopes.

Check the following:

Envelopes should have a lengthwise

sealing flap.

The sealing flaps should be folded crisply

and correctly (irregularly cut or folded

envelopes may cause paper jams).

Envelopes should consist of two layers of

paper in the area circled in the figure

below.

1 Feeding direction

Envelope joints that are sealed by the

manufacturer should be secure.

We recommend that you do not print

within 0.6 in. (15 mm) of the edges of

envelopes.

Types of envelopes to avoid 2

IMPORTANT

DO NOT use envelopes:

• that are damaged, curled, wrinkled or

an unusual shape

• that are extremely shiny or textured

• with clasps, staples, snaps or tie

strings

• with self-adhesive closures

• that are of a baggy construction

• that are not sharply creased

• that are embossed (have raised writing

on them)

• that were previously printed by a

laser/LED machine

• that are pre-printed on the inside

• that cannot be arranged neatly when

stacked

• that are made of paper that weighs

more than the paper weight

specifications for the machine

• with edges that are not straight or

consistently square

• with windows, holes, cut-outs or

perforations

• with glue on surface as shown in figure

below

• with double flaps as shown in figure

below

Chapter 2

• with sealing flaps that have not been

folded at purchase

• with sealing flaps as shown in figure

below

• with each side folded as shown in

figure below

If you use any of the types of envelopes

listed above, they may damage your

machine. This damage may not be

covered under any Brother warranty or

service agreement.

Occasionally you may experience paper

feed problems caused by the thickness,

size and flap shape of the envelopes you

are using.

Labels 2

The machine will print on most types of labels

designed for use with a laser machine. Labels

should have an adhesive that is acrylic-based

since this material is more stable at the high

temperatures in the fuser unit. Adhesives

should not come in contact with any part of

the machine, because the label stock may

stick to the drum unit or rollers and cause

jams and print quality problems. No adhesive

should be exposed between the labels.

Labels should be arranged so that they cover

the entire length and width of the sheet. Using

labels with spaces may result in labels

peeling off and causing serious jams or print

problems.

All labels used in this machine must be able

to withstand a temperature of 392 degrees

Fahrenheit (200 degrees centigrade) for a

period of 0.1 seconds.

Label sheets should not exceed the paper

weight specifications described in this User’s

Guide. Labels exceeding this specification

may not feed or print properly and may cause

damage to your machine.

Labels must be fed from the manual feed slot

only.

Types of labels to avoid 2

Do not use labels that are damaged, curled,

wrinkled or an unusual shape.

IMPORTANT

Avoid feeding labels with the carrier sheet

exposed because your machine will be

damaged.

Loading paper and documents

Loading documents 2

Using the automatic

document feeder (ADF) 2

The ADF can hold up to 35 pages and feeds

each sheet individually. Use standard 20 lb

(80 g/m2) paper and always fan the pages

before putting them in the ADF.

Recommended environment 2

IMPORTANT

• DO NOT leave thick documents on the

scanner glass. If you do this, the ADF may

jam.

• DO NOT use paper that is curled,

wrinkled, folded, ripped, stapled, paper-

clipped, pasted or taped.

• DO NOT use cardboard, newspaper or

fabric.

• To avoid damaging your machine while

using the ADF, DO NOT pull on the

document while it is feeding.

Note

To scan documents that are not suitable

for the ADF, see Using the scanner glass

on page 24.

Make sure documents with correction fluid

or written with ink are completely dry.

Documents to be faxed must be from 5.8

to 8.5 in. (147.3 to 215.9 mm) wide and

from 5.8 to 14 in. (147.3 to 355.6 mm)

long, and of a standard

weight[20lb(80g/m

2)].

aUnfold the ADF document output

support flap (1) and the ADF support

flap (2).

bFan the pages well.

cPlace your document face up, top edge

first in the ADF until the LCD display

message changes and you feel it touch

the feed rollers.

dAdjust the paper guides (1) to fit the

width of your document.

Temperature: 68F to 86F (20C to 30C)

Humidity: 50% - 70%

Paper: Xerox 4200 (20 lb/Letter)

Chapter 2

Using the scanner glass 2

You can use the scanner glass to fax, copy or

scan pages of a book one page at a time.

Documents can be up to 8.5 in. wide and

11.7 in. long (215.9 mm wide and 297 mm

long).

Note

To use the scanner glass, the ADF must

be empty.

aLift the document cover.

bUsing the document guidelines on the

left and top, place the document face

down in the upper left corner of the

scanner glass.

cClose the document cover.

IMPORTANT

If the document is a book or is thick do not

slam the cover or press on it.

Mode Timer 3

The machine has three mode keys on the

control panel: FAX, SCAN, and COPY.

You can set how much time the machine

takes after the last Copy or Scan operation to

return to Fax mode. If you choose Off, the

machine will stay in the mode you used last.

This setting also sets the time the machine

will change from individual user to the Public

mode when using Secure Function Lock.

(See Switching Users on page 32.)

aPress Menu, 1, 1.

General Setup

1.Mode Timer

bPress a or b to choose 0 Sec,

30 Secs, 1 Min, 2 Mins, 5 Mins or

Off.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Paper settings 3

Paper Type 3

Set up the machine for the type of paper you

are using. This will give you the best print

quality.

aPress Menu, 1, 2, 1.

Paper

1.Paper Type

bPress a or b to choose Thin, Plain,

Thick, Thicker or

Recycled Paper.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Paper Size 3

You can use ten sizes of paper for printing

copies: A4, Letter, Legal, Executive, A5,

A5 L, A6, B5, B6 and Folio and four sizes for

printing faxes: A4, Letter, Legal or

Folio (8.5"13").

When you change the size of paper in the

tray, you will also need to change the setting

for paper size at the same time so your

machine can fit the document or an incoming

fax on the page.

aPress Menu, 1, 2, 2.

Paper

2.Paper Size

bPress a or b to choose A4, Letter,

Legal, Executive, A5, A5 L, A6, B5,

B6 or Folio.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

General Setup 3

Chapter 3

Volume settings 3

Ring volume 3

You can choose a ring volume level from a

range of settings, from High to Off.

While in Fax mode press or to adjust

the volume level. The LCD will show the

current setting, and each key press will

change the volume to the next level. The

machine will keep the new setting until you

change it.

You can also change the ring volume through

the menu:

aPress Menu, 1, 3, 1.

Volume

1.Ring

bPress a or b to choose Off, Low, Med or

High.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Beeper volume 3

When the beeper is on, the machine will beep

when you press a key, make a mistake, or

after you send or receive a fax. You can

choose a range of volume levels, from High

to Off.

aPress Menu, 1, 3, 2.

Volume

2.Beeper

bPress a or b to choose Off, Low, Med or

High.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Speaker volume 3

You can choose a range of speaker volume

levels, from High to Off.

aPress Menu, 1, 3, 3.

Volume

3.Speaker

bPress a or b to choose Off, Low, Med or

High.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

You can also adjust the speaker volume with

the control panel keys.

aPress (FAX).

bPress Hook.

cPress or .

This setting will stay until you change it

again.

dPress Hook.

General Setup

Automatic daylight

savings time 3

You can set the machine to change

automatically for Daylight Savings Time. It

will set itself forward one hour in the Spring,

and back one hour in the Fall.

aPress Menu, 1, 4.

General Setup

4.Auto Daylight

bPress a or b to choose On or Off.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Ecology features 3

Toner Save 3

You can save toner using this feature. When

you set Toner Save to On, print appears

lighter. The default setting is Off.

a Press Menu, 1, 5, 1.

Ecology

1.Toner Save

bPress a or b to choose On or Off.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Note

We do not recommend Toner Save for

printing Photo or Gray Scale images.

Sleep Time 3

The Sleep Time setting can reduce power

consumption by turning off the fuser while the

machine is idle.

You can choose how long the machine must

be idle before it goes into sleep mode. When

the machine receives a fax, computer data, or

makes a copy, the timer will be reset. The

default setting is 005 minutes.

While the machine is in sleep mode the LCD

will display Sleep. When printing or copying

in sleep mode, there will be a short delay

while the fuser warms up.

aPress Menu, 1, 5, 2.

Ecology

2.Sleep Time

bEnter the length of time the machine is

idle before entering sleep mode.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Chapter 3

LCD Contrast 3

You can change the contrast to make the

LCD look lighter or darker.

aPress Menu, 1, 6.

General Setup

6.LCD Contrast

bPress a to make the LCD darker. Or,

press b to make the LCD lighter.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Dial Prefix 3

The Dial Prefix setting will automatically dial a

predefined number before every fax number

you dial. For example: If your telephone

system requires a 9 to dial an outside number

use this setting to automatically dial 9 for

every fax you send.

Setting up the prefix number 3

a(USA) Press Menu, 0, 5.

(Canada) Press Menu, 0, 6.

bEnter the prefix number (up to 5 digits)

on the dial pad.

Press OK.

Note

• You can use the numbers 0 to 9, #, l

and !. (Press Hook to display “!”.)

You cannot use ! with any other numbers

or characters.

If your telephone system requires a timed

break recall (hookflash), press Hook to

enter the break.

• (Canada only) If the pulse dialing mode is

on, # and l are not available to use.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Changing the prefix number 3

a(USA) Press Menu, 0, 5.

(Canada) Press Menu, 0, 6.

bDo one of the following:

To change the prefix number,

press 1.

To exit without making a change,

press 2. Go to step d.

cEnter a new prefix number using the dial

pad (up to 5 digits), press OK.

dPress Stop/Exit.

Secure Function Lock

2.0 (MFC-9325CW only)4

Secure Function Lock lets you restrict Public

access to the following machine functions:

Fax Tx

Fax Rx

Copy

Scan

USB Direct

PC Print

Color Print

This feature also prevents users from

changing the Default settings of the machine

by limiting access to the Menu settings.

Before using the security features you must

first enter an administrator password.

Access to restricted operations can be

enabled by creating a restricted user.

Restricted users must enter a user password

to use the machine.

Make a careful note of your password. If you

forget it, you will have to reset the password

stored in the machine. For information about

how to reset the password call Brother

Customer Service.

Note

• Secure Function Lock can be set manually

at the control panel or by using Web

Based Management. We recommend

using Web Based Management to

configure this feature. For more

information, see the Network User’s

Guide on the CD-ROM.

• Only administrators can set limitations

and make changes for each user.

• When Secure Function Lock is on, you

can only use 1.Contrast,

6.Polled TX and 7.Coverpg Setup

under 2.Setup Send in the Fax menu.

If Fax Tx is disabled, you cannot use any

function in the Fax menu.

• Polling Receive is enabled only when both

Fax Tx and Fax Rx are enabled.

Setting the password for the

administrator 4

The password you set in these steps is for the

administrator. This password is used to set

up users and to turn Secure Function Lock on

or off. (See Setting up restricted users

on page 31 and Turning Secure Function

Lock on/off on page 31.)

aPress Menu, 1, 7, 1.

Security

1.Function Lock

bEnter a four-digit number for the

password using numbers 0-9.

Press OK.

cRe-enter the password when the LCD

shows Verify:.

Press OK.

dPress Stop/Exit.

Security features 4

Chapter 4

Changing the password for

the administrator 4

aPress Menu, 1, 7, 1.

Security

1.Function Lock

bPress a or b to choose Set Password.

Press OK.

cEnter the registered four-digit password.

Press OK.

dEnter a four-digit number for the new

password.

Press OK.

eIf the LCD shows Verify: re-enter the

new password.

Press OK.

fPress Stop/Exit.

Setting up the public user

mode 4

Public user mode restricts the functions that

are available for Public users. Public users do

not need to enter a password to access the

features made available through this setting.

You can set up one Public user.

aPress Menu, 1, 7, 1.

Security

1.Function Lock

bPress a or b to choose Setup ID.

Press OK.

cEnter the administrator password.

Press OK.

dPress a or b to choose Public.

Press OK.

ePress a or b to choose On or Off for

Fax Tx.

Press OK.

After you have set Fax Tx, repeat this

step for Fax Rx, Copy, Scan,

USB Direct, PC Print and

Color Print. When the LCD shows

Exit, press OK.

fPress Stop/Exit.

Security features

Setting up restricted users 4

You can set up users with restrictions and a

password for functions that are available to

them. You can set up more advanced

restrictions, such as by page count or PC

user login name, through Web Based

Management. (For more information, see the

Network User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.) You

can set up to 25 restricted users with

restrictions and a password.

aPress Menu, 1, 7, 1.

Security

1.Function Lock

bPress a or b to choose Setup ID.

Press OK.

cEnter the administrator password.

Press OK.

dPress a or b to choose User01.

Press OK.

eUse the numeric keys to enter the user

name. (See Entering text on page 219.)

Press OK.

fEnter a four-digit password for the user.

Press OK.

gPress a or b to choose On or Off for

Fax Tx.

Press OK.

After you have set Fax Tx, repeat this

step for Fax Rx, Copy, Scan,

USB Direct, PC Print and

Color Print. When the LCD shows

Exit, press OK.

hRepeat steps d to g for entering each

additional user and password.

iPress Stop/Exit.

Note

You cannot use the same name as

another user’s name.

Turning Secure Function

Lock on/off 4

If you enter the wrong password, the LCD will

show Wrong Password. Re-enter the

correct password.

Turning Secure Function Lock on

aPress Menu, 1, 7, 1.

Security

1.Function Lock

bPress a or b to choose Lock OffiOn.

Press OK.

cEnter your four-digit administrator

password.

Press OK.

Turning Secure Function Lock off

aPress Menu, 1, 7, 1.

Security

1.Function Lock

bPress a or b to choose Lock OniOff.

Press OK.

cEnter your four-digit administrator

password.

Press OK.

Chapter 4

Switching Users 4

This setting allows you to switch between

registered restricted users or Public mode

when Secure Function Lock is turned on.

Changing to the restricted user Mode

aHold down Shift as you press Secure.

Change ID

user 1

bPress a or b to choose your name.

Press OK.

cEnter your four-digit password.

Press OK.

Note

If you press a Mode key that is restricted,

Access Denied will appear on the LCD

and then the machine will ask your name.

If you are a restricted user with access to

this Mode, press a or b to choose your

name and enter your four-digit password.

Changing to the Public Mode

After a restricted user has finished using the

machine, it will return to the Public setting

within the same time as the Mode Timer

setting (Menu, 1, 1). (See Mode Timer

on page 25.) You can also exit from the

restricted user mode by pressing the current

Mode key you are in. Then LCD will ask you

Go to Public?.

Press 1 to choose 1. Yes.

Memory Security

(MFC-9125CN only) 4

Memory Security lets you prevent

unauthorized access to the machine.

While Memory Security is on, the following

operations are available:

Receiving faxes into memory (limited by

memory capacity)

Fax Forwarding (if Fax Forwarding was

already on)

Paging (if Paging was already on)

Remote Retrieval (if Fax Storage was

already on)

While Memory Security is on, the following

operations are NOT available:

Printing received faxes

Sending faxes

Copying

PC printing

Scanning

PC Fax Receive

Note

• To print the faxes in memory, turn off

Memory Security.

• You must turn off PC Fax Receive before

you can turn on Memory Security. (See

Turning off Remote Fax Options

on page 75.)

Security features

Setting up the password 4

Note

• If you have already set the password, you

will not need to set it, again.

• If you forget the Memory Security

password, please call Brother Customer

Service (See Brother numbers

on page i.).

aPress Menu, 1, 7, 1.

Security

1.Mem Security

bEnter a four-digit number for the

password using numbers 0-9.

Press OK.

cRe-enter the password when the LCD

shows Verify:.

Press OK.

dPress Stop/Exit.

Changing your memory

security password 4

aPress Menu, 1, 7, 1.

Security

1.Mem Security

bPress a or b to choose Set Password.

Press OK.

cEnter your four-digit password.

Press OK.

dEnter a four-digit number for the new

password.

Press OK.

eRe-enter the password when the LCD

shows Verify:.

Press OK.

fPress Stop/Exit.

Turning memory security

on/off 4

If you enter the wrong password when

following the instructions below, the LCD will

show Wrong Password. Re-enter the

correct password.

Turning memory security on

aPress Menu, 1, 7, 1.

Security

1.Mem Security

bPress a or b to choose Set Security.

Press OK.

cEnter your registered four-digit

password.

Press OK.

The machine goes offline and the LCD

shows Secure Mode.

Note

If there is a power failure the data will stay

in memory for up to 60 hours.

Turning memory security off

aPress Menu.

Enter the registered four-digit password.

Press OK.

bMemory Security is automatically turned

off and the LCD shows the date and

time.

Note

If you enter the wrong password, the LCD

shows Wrong Password and stays

offline. The machine will stay in Secure

Mode until the registered password is

entered.

Chapter 4

Setting Lock 4

Setting Lock lets you set a password to stop

other people from accidentally changing your

machine settings.

Make a careful note of your password. If you

forget it, you will have to reset the passwords

stored in the machine. Please call your

administrator or Brother Customer Service.

While Setting Lock is On, you cannot change

the following settings without a password:

Date/Time

Station ID

Quick Dial settings

Mode Timer

Paper Type

Paper Size

Volume

Auto Daylight

Ecology

LCD Contrast

Setting Lock

Secure Function Lock (MFC-9325CW)

Memory Security (MFC-9125CN)

Dial Restriction

Setting up the password 4

aPress Menu, 1, 7, 2.

Security

2.Setting Lock

bEnter a four-digit number for the

password using numbers 0-9.

Press OK.

cRe-enter your password when the LCD

shows Verify:.

Press OK.

dPress Stop/Exit.

Changing your Setting Lock

password 4

aPress Menu, 1, 7, 2.

Security

2.Setting Lock

bPress a or b to choose Set Password.

Press OK.

cEnter your four-digit password.

Press OK.

dEnter a four-digit number for the new

password.

Press OK.

eRe-enter your new password when the

LCD shows Verify:.

Press OK.

fPress Stop/Exit.

Security features

Turning Setting Lock on/off 4

If you enter the wrong password when

following the instructions below, the LCD will

show Wrong Password. Re-enter the

correct password.

Turning Setting Lock on

aPress Menu, 1, 7, 2.

Security

2.Setting Lock

bPress a or b to choose On.

Press OK.

cEnter your four-digit password.

Press OK.

dPress Stop/Exit.

Turning Setting Lock off

aPress Menu, 1, 7, 2.

Security

2.Setting Lock

bEnter your four-digit password.

Press OK twice.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Restricting dialing 4

This feature is to prevent users from sending

a fax or call to a wrong number by mistake.

You can set the machine to restrict dialing by

using the dial pad, One Touch or Speed Dial.

If you choose Off, the machine does not

restrict any dialing method.

If you choose Enter # twice, the machine

will prompt you to re-enter the number, and

then if you re-enter the same number

correctly, the machine will start dialing. If you

re-enter the wrong number, the LCD will

show an error message.

If you choose On, the machine will restrict all

fax sending and outbound calls.

Dial pad restriction 4

aPress Menu, 2, 6, 1.

Dial Restrict.

1.Dial Pad

bPress a or b to choose Off,

Enter # twice or On.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

One Touch restriction 4

aPress Menu, 2, 6, 2.

Dial Restrict.

2.One Touch Dial

bPress a or b to choose Off,

Enter # twice or On.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Chapter 4

Speed Dial restriction 4

aPress Menu, 2, 6, 3.

Dial Restrict.

3.Speed Dial

bPress a or b to choose Off,

Enter # twice or On.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Note

•The Enter # twice setting will not work

if you use an external phone or press

Hook before entering the number. You will

not be asked to re-enter the number.

• You can not restrict dialing when you use

Redial/Pause.

• If you chose On or Enter # twice, you

can not use the Broadcasting feature and

can not combine quick dial numbers when

dialing.

Section II

Fax II

Sending a fax 38

Receiving a fax 46

Telephone services and external devices 53

Dialing and storing numbers 63

Remote Fax Options (black & white only) 72

Polling 79

Printing reports 81

How to fax 5

Entering fax mode 5

To enter fax mode press (FAX), and the

key will glow blue.

Sending a fax from the ADF 5

Using the ADF to send your faxes is the

easiest way. To cancel a fax in progress

press Stop/Exit.

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bPlace your document face up, top edge

first in the ADF until the LCD display

changes and you feel it touch the rollers.

cDial the fax number. (See How to dial

on page 63.)

dPress Black Start or Color Start.

If you press Black Start, the

machine scans the pages into

memory and then sends the

document.

If you press Color Start, the

machine starts dialing and sends the

document in real time.

Note

If an Out of Memory message appears

while scanning a document into memory,

press Stop/Exit to cancel or Black Start

to send the scanned pages.

Sending a fax from the

scanner glass 5

You can use the scanner glass to fax the

pages of a book, or a single page at a time.

The documents can be up to Letter or A4

size. Press Stop/Exit to cancel a fax in

progress.

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bPlace your document face down on the

scanner glass.

cDial the fax number. (See How to dial

on page 63.)

dPress Black Start or Color Start.

If you press Black Start, the

machine starts scanning the first

page. Go to step e.

If you press Color Start, the

machine starts sending. Go to

step g.

eAfter the machine scans the page, the

LCD will prompt you to choose one of

the options below:

Next Page?

1.Yes 2.No(Send)

Press 1 to send another page. Go to

step f.

Press 2 or Black Start to send the

document. Go to step g.

fPlace the next page on the scanner

glass, press OK. Repeat steps e and f

for each additional page.

Set Next Page

Then Press OK

Sending a fax 5

Sending a fax

gYour machine will automatically send

the fax.

Note

When faxing multiple pages from the

scanner glass, real time transmission

should be set to Off. (See Real Time

Transmission on page 43.)

Faxing A4 size documents

from the scanner glass 5

When faxing A4 size documents, you will

need to set the scan glass size to A4;

otherwise, a portion of your faxes will be

missing.

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bPress Menu, 1, 8, 1.

Document Scan

1.Glass ScanSize

cPress a or b to choose A4.

Press OK.

dPress Stop/Exit.

Canceling a fax in progress 5

Press Stop/Exit to cancel the fax. If you

press Stop/Exit while the machine is dialing

or sending, the LCD will show

1.Clear 2.Exit, press 1 to cancel the

fax.

Broadcasting

(black & white only) 5

Broadcasting lets you send the same fax

message to more than one fax number. You

can include Groups, One Touch, Speed Dial

numbers and up to 50 manually dialed

numbers in the same broadcast.

You can broadcast up to 258 different

numbers. This will depend on how many

groups, access codes or credit card numbers

you have stored, and on how many delayed

or stored faxes in memory.

Note

Use (Address Book) to help you

choose numbers easily.

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bLoad your document.

cEnter a number.

Press OK.

You can use either a One Touch,

Speed Dial, a Group number, or a

number manually entered using the dial

pad. (See How to dial on page 63.)

dRepeat step c until you have entered

all the fax numbers you want to

broadcast to.

ePress Black Start.

After the broadcast is finished the machine

will print a broadcast report to let you know

the results.

Note

The scan profile of the One Touch,

Speed Dial or Group number you chose

first will be applied to the broadcast.

Chapter 5

Canceling a Broadcast in

progress 5

aPress Menu, 2, 7.

The LCD will show the Broadcast job

number followed by the fax number (or

name) being dialed (for example, #001

0123456789).

bPress OK.

The LCD will show the following

message:

#001 0123456789

1.Clear 2.Exit

cPress 1 to cancel the fax number being

dialed.

The LCD will then show the following

message:

Broadcast #001

1.Clear 2.Exit

dTo cancel the Broadcast, press 1.

ePress Stop/Exit.

Additional sending

operations 5

Sending faxes using multiple

settings 5

Before you send a fax, you can change any

combination of these settings: contrast,

resolution, overseas mode, delayed fax timer,

polling transmission, real time transmission

or cover page settings.

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

After each setting is accepted, the LCD

asks if you want to enter more settings:

Other Settings

1.Yes 2.No

bDo one of the following:

To choose more settings, press 1.

The LCD returns to the Setup Send

menu so you can choose another

setting.

If you have finished choosing

settings, press 2 and go to the next

step for sending your fax.

Sending a fax

Electronic cover page

(black & white only) 5

This feature will not work unless you have

already programmed your Station ID. (See

the Quick Setup Guide.)

You can automatically send a cover page

with every fax. Your cover page includes your

Station ID, a comment, and the name (or

number) stored in the One Touch or Speed

Dial memory.

By choosing Next Fax:On you can also

display the number of pages on the cover

page.

You can choose one of the following preset

comments.

1.Comment Off

2.Please Call

3.Urgent

4.Confidential

Instead of using one of the preset comments,

you can enter two personal messages of your

own, up to 26 characters long. Use the chart

on page 219 for help entering characters.

(See Composing your own comments

on page 41.)

5.(User Defined)

6.(User Defined)

Composing your own comments 5

You can set up two comments of your own.

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bPress Menu, 2, 2, 8.

Setup Send

8.Coverpage Msg

cPress a or b to choose 5 or 6 to store

your own comment.

Press OK.

dEnter your own comment using the dial

pad.

Press OK.

Use the chart on page 219 for help entering

characters.

Send a cover page for the next fax 5

If you want to send a cover page only for the

next fax, your machine will ask you to enter

the number of pages you are sending so it

can be printed on the cover page.

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bLoad your document.

cPress Menu, 2, 2, 7.

Setup Send

7.Coverpg Setup

dPress a or b to choose Next Fax:On

(or Next Fax:Off).

Press OK.

ePress a or b to choose a comment.

Press OK.

fEnter two digits to show the number of

pages you are sending.

Press OK.

For example, enter 0, 2 for 2 pages or

0,0 to leave the number of pages blank.

If you make a mistake, press d or

Clear/Back to back up and re-enter the

number of pages.

Chapter 5

Send a cover page for all faxes 5

You can set the machine to send a cover

page whenever you send a fax.

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bPress Menu, 2, 2, 7.

Setup Send

7.Coverpg Setup

cPress a or b to choose On (or Off).

Press OK.

dPress a or b to choose a comment.

Press OK.

Using a printed cover page 5

If you want to use a printed cover page that

you can write on, you can print the sample

page and attach it to your fax.

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bPress Menu, 2, 2, 7.

Setup Send

7.Coverpg Setup

cPress a or b to choose Print Sample.

Press OK.

dPress Start.

eAfter the machine prints a copy of your

cover page, press Stop/Exit.

Contrast 5

For most documents the default setting of

Auto will give the best results. It

automatically chooses the suitable contrast

for your document.

If your document is very light or dark,

changing the contrast may improve the

quality of the fax.

Use Dark to make the faxed document

lighter.

Use Light to make the faxed document

darker.

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bLoad your document.

cPress Menu, 2, 2, 1.

Setup Send

1.Contrast

dPress a or b to choose Auto, Light or

Dark.

Press OK.

Note

Even if you choose Light or Dark, the

machine will send the fax using the Auto

setting if you choose Photo as the Fax

Resolution.

Changing Fax Resolution 5

The quality of a fax can be improved by

changing the Fax Resolution. Resolution can

be changed for the next fax or for all faxes.

To change the Fax Resolution setting

for the next fax 5

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bLoad your document.

cPress Resolution, then a or b to choose

the resolution.

Press OK.

Sending a fax

To change the default Fax Resolution

setting 5

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bPress Menu, 2, 2, 2.

Setup Send

2.Fax Resolution

cPress a or b to choose the resolution

you want.

Press OK.

Note

You can choose four different resolution

settings for black & white faxes and two for

color.

Black & white:

Standard: Suitable for most typed

documents.

Fine: Good for small print and transmits a

little slower than Standard resolution.

S.Fine: Good for small print or artwork

and transmits slower than Fine

resolution.

Photo: Use when the document has

varying shades of gray or is a photograph.

This has the slowest transmission time.

Color:

Standard: Suitable for most typed

documents.

Fine: Use when the document is a

photograph. The transmission time is

slower than Standard resolution.

If you choose S.Fine or Photo and then

use the Color Start key to send a fax, the

machine will send the fax using the Fine

setting.

Dual access

(black & white only) 5

You can dial a number, and start scanning the

fax into memory—even when the machine is

sending from memory, receiving faxes or

printing PC data. The LCD will show the new

job number.

The number of pages you can scan into the

memory will vary depending on the data that

is printed on them.

Note

If you get an Out of Memory message

while scanning the first page of a fax,

press Stop/Exit to cancel scanning. If you

get an Out of Memory message while

scanning a subsequent page, you can

press Black Start to send the pages

scanned so far, or press Stop/Exit to

cancel the operation.

Real Time Transmission 5

When you are sending a fax, the machine will

scan the documents into the memory before

sending it. Then, as soon as the telephone

line is free, the machine will start dialing and

sending.

Sometimes, you may want to send an

important document immediately, without

waiting for memory transmission. You can set

Real Time TX to On for all documents or

Next Fax:On for the next fax only.

Note

• If the memory is full and you are sending a

black and white fax from the ADF, the

machine will send the document in real

time (even if Real Time TX is set to Off). If

the memory is full, faxes from the scanner

glass cannot be sent until you clear some

of the memory.

• In Real Time Transmission, the automatic

redial feature does not work when using

the scanner glass.

Chapter 5

Sending in real time for all faxes 5

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bPress Menu, 2, 2, 5.

Setup Send

5.Real Time TX

cPress a or b to choose On.

Press OK.

Sending in real time for the next fax

only 5

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bPress Menu, 2, 2, 5.

Setup Send

5.Real Time TX

cPress a or b to choose Next Fax:On.

Press OK.

Overseas Mode 5

If you are having difficulty sending a fax

overseas due to a bad connection, then

turning on Overseas Mode may help.

This is a temporary setting, and will only be

active for your next fax.

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bLoad your document.

cPress Menu, 2, 2, 9.

Setup Send

9.Overseas Mode

dPress a or b to choose On or Off.

Press OK.

Delayed Fax

(black & white only) 5

You can store up to 50 faxes in the memory

to be sent within a twenty four hour period.

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bLoad your document.

cPress Menu, 2, 2, 3.

Setup Send

3.Delayed Fax

dEnter the time you want the fax to be

sent (in 24-hour format).

(For example, enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM)

Press OK.

Note

The number of pages you can scan into

the memory depends on the amount of

data printed on each page.

Delayed batch transmission

(black & white only) 5

Before sending the delayed faxes, your

machine will help you economize by sorting

all the faxes in the memory by destination and

scheduled time.

All delayed faxes that are scheduled to be

sent at the same time to the same fax number

will be sent as one fax to save transmission

time.

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bPress Menu, 2, 2, 4.

Setup Send

4.Batch TX

cPress a or b to choose On or Off.

Press OK.

dPress Stop/Exit.

Sending a fax

Checking and canceling

waiting jobs 5

Check which jobs are still waiting in the

memory to be sent. If there are no jobs, the

LCD will show No Jobs Waiting. You can

cancel a fax job that is stored and waiting in

the memory.

aPress Menu, 2, 7.

The number of jobs still to be sent will be

displayed.

bDo one of the following:

Press a or b to scroll though the

waiting jobs, press OK to choose a

job, and then press 1 to cancel it.

Press 2 to exit without canceling.

cWhen you have finished, press

Stop/Exit.

Sending a fax manually 5

Manual transmission 5

Manual transmission lets you hear the

dialing, ringing and fax-receiving tones while

sending a fax.

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bLoad your document.

cPress Hook and listen for a dial tone.

Or pick up the handset of the external

telephone and listen for a dial tone.

dDial the fax number you want to call.

eWhen you hear the fax tone, press

Black Start or Color Start.

If you are using the scanner glass,

press 1 to send a fax.

fReplace the handset of an external

telephone.

Sending a fax at the end of a

conversation 5

At the end of a conversation you can send a

fax to the other party before you both hang

up.

aAsk the other party to wait for fax tones

(beeps) and then to press the Start or

Send key before hanging up.

bMake sure you are in Fax mode .

cLoad your document.

dPress Black Start or Color Start.

If you are using the scanner glass,

press 1 to send a fax.

eReplace the handset of an external

telephone.

Out of memory message 5

If you get an Out of Memory message

while scanning the first page of a fax, press

Stop/Exit to cancel the fax.

If you get an Out of Memory message

while scanning a subsequent page, you will

have the option to press Black Start to send

the pages scanned so far, or to press

Stop/Exit to cancel the operation.

Note

If you get an Out of Memory message

while faxing and you do not want to delete

your stored faxes to clear the memory,

you can send the fax in real time. (See

Real Time Transmission on page 43.)

Choose the correct Receive Mode 6

The correct Receive Mode is determined by the external devices and telephone subscriber

services (Voice Mail, Distinctive Ring, etc.) you have (or will be using) on the same line as the

Brother machine.

Receiving a fax 6

Will you be using a Distinctive Ring number for receiving faxes?

Brother uses the term "Distinctive Ring" but different telephone companies may have other names for this

service such as Custom Ringing, RingMaster, Personalized Ring, Teen Ring, Ident-A-Ring, Ident-A-Call,

Data Ident-A-Call, Smart Ring and SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate Number Ringing. (See Distinctive Ring

on page 54 for instructions on setting up your machine using this feature.)

Will you be using Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine?

If you have Voice Mail on the same telephone line as your Brother machine, there is a strong possibility

that Voice Mail and the Brother machine will conflict with each other when receiving incoming calls. (See

Voice Mail on page 53 for instructions on setting up your machine using this service.)

Will you be using a Telephone Answering Device on the same telephone line as your Brother

machine?

Your external telephone answering device (TAD) will automatically answer every call. Voice messages are

stored on the external TAD and fax messages are printed. Choose External TAD as your receive mode.

(See Connecting an external TAD (telephone answering device) on page 57.)

Will you be using your Brother machine on a dedicated fax line?

Your machine automatically answers every call as a fax. Choose Fax Only as your receive mode. (See

Fax Only on page 48.)

Will you be using your Brother machine on the same line as your telephone?

Do you want to receive voice calls and faxes automatically?

The Fax/Tel receive mode is used when sharing the Brother machine and your telephone on the

same line. Choose Fax/Tel as your receive mode. (See Fax/Tel on page 48.)

Important Note: You can not receive voice messages on either Voice Mail or an answering

machine when choosing the Fax/Tel mode.

Do you expect to receive very few faxes?

Choose Manual as your receive mode. You control the telephone line and must answer every call

yourself. (See Manual on page 48.)

Receiving a fax

To set the receive mode follow the instructions below:

aPress Menu, 0, 1.

Initial Setup

1.Receive Mode

bPress a or b to choose the receive mode.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

The LCD will display the current receive mode.

Chapter 6

Using receive modes 6

Some receive modes answer automatically

(Fax Only and Fax/Tel). You may want to

change the Ring Delay before using these

modes. (See Ring Delay on page 49.)

Fax Only 6

Fax Only mode will automatically answer

every call as a fax.

Fax/Tel 6

Fax/Tel mode helps you automatically

manage incoming calls, by recognizing

whether they are fax or voice calls and

handling them in one of the following ways:

Faxes will be automatically received.

Voice calls will start the F/T ring to tell you

to pick up the line. The F/T ring is a fast

double ring made by your machine.

(Also see F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)

on page 49 and Ring Delay on page 49.)

Manual 6

Manual mode turns off all automatic

answering functions unless you are using the

Distinctive Ring Receive feature.

To receive a fax in Manual mode lift the

handset of the external telephone or press

Hook. When you hear fax tones (short

repeating beeps), press Black Start, and

then press 2 to receive a fax. You can also

use the Easy Receive feature to receive

faxes by lifting a handset on the same line as

the machine.

(Also see Easy Receive on page 50.)

External TAD 6

External TAD mode lets an external

answering device manage your incoming

calls. Incoming calls will be handled in the

following ways:

Faxes will be automatically received.

Voice callers can record a message on the

external TAD.

(For more information see Connecting an

external TAD (telephone answering device)

on page 57.)

Receiving a fax

Receive Mode settings 6

Ring Delay 6

The Ring Delay setting sets the number of

times the machine rings before it answers in

Fax Only and Fax/Tel modes.

If you have external or extension telephones

on the same line as the machine, keep the

Ring Delay setting of 4. (See Easy Receive

on page 50.)

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bPress Menu, 2, 1, 1.

Setup Receive

1.Ring Delay

cPress a or b to choose 00, 01, 02, 03 or

04 for how many times the line rings

before the machine answers.

Press OK.

dPress Stop/Exit.

Note

Choose 00 in step c to have the machine

answer immediately.

F/T Ring Time

(Fax/Tel mode only) 6

When somebody calls your machine, you and

your caller will hear the normal telephone ring

sound. The number of rings is set by the Ring

Delay setting.

If the call is a fax, then your machine will

receive it; however, if it is a voice call the

machine will sound the F/T ring (a fast

double-ring) for the time you have set in the

F/T Ring Time setting. If you hear the F/T ring

it means that you have a voice caller on the

line.

Because the F/T ring is made by the machine,

extension and external telephones will not

ring; however, you can still answer the call on

any telephone. (For more information see

Using Remote Codes on page 61.)

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bPress Menu, 2, 1, 2.

Setup Receive

2.F/T Ring Time

cPress a or b to choose how long the

machine will ring to alert you that you

have a voice call (20, 30, 40 or

70 seconds).

Press OK.

dPress Stop/Exit.

Chapter 6

Easy Receive 6

If Easy Receive is On:6

The machine can receive a fax automatically,

even if you answer the call. When you see

Receiving on the LCD or hear a click on the

phone line through the handset you are

using, just replace the handset. Your

machine will do the rest.

If Easy Receive is Off:6

If you are at the machine and answer a fax

call first by lifting the external handset, then

press Black Start or Color Start, and then

press 2 to receive.

If you answered at an extension telephone

press l51.

Note

• If this feature is set to On, but your

machine does not connect a fax call when

you lift an extension telephone handset,

press the fax receive code l51.

• If you send faxes from a computer on the

same telephone line and the machine

intercepts them, set Easy Receive to Off.

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bPress Menu, 2, 1, 3.

Setup Receive

3.Easy Receive

cPress a or b to choose On or Off.

Press OK.

dPress Stop/Exit.

Setting the Print Density 6

You can adjust the Print Density setting to

make your printed pages darker or lighter.

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

b Press Menu, 2, 1, 6.

Setup Receive

6.Print Density

cPress a to make the print darker.

Or, press b to make the print lighter.

Press OK.

dPress Stop/Exit.

Receiving a fax

Additional receiving

operations 6

Printing a reduced incoming

fax 6

If you choose On, the machine automatically

reduces each page of an incoming fax to fit on

one page of A4, Letter, Legal or Folio size

paper.

The machine calculates the reduction ratio by

using the page size of the fax and your Paper

Size setting (Menu, 1, 2, 2).

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bPress Menu, 2, 1, 5.

Setup Receive

5.Auto Reduction

cPress a or b to choose On or Off.

Press OK.

dPress Stop/Exit.

Setting the Fax Receive

Stamp (black & white only) 6

You can set the machine to print the received

date and time in the top center of each

received fax page.

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bPress Menu, 2, 1, 8.

Setup Receive

8.Fax Rx Stamp

cPress a or b to choose On or Off.

Press OK.

dPress Stop/Exit.

Note

• The received time and date will not appear

when using Internet Fax.

• Make sure you have set the current date

and time in the machine. (See the Quick

Setup Guide.)

Receiving a fax at the end of a

conversation 6

At the end of a conversation you can ask the

other party to send you a fax before you both

hang up.

aAsk the other party to place the

document in their machine and to press

the Start or Send key.

bWhen you hear the CNG tones (slowly

repeating beeps), press Black Start or

Color Start.

cPress 2 to receive a fax.

dReplace the external handset.

Chapter 6

Printing a fax from the

memory 6

If you are using the Fax Storage feature

(Menu, 2, 5, 1), you can still print a fax from

the memory when you are at your machine.

(See Fax Storage on page 73.)

aPress Menu, 2, 5, 3.

Remote Fax Opt

3.Print Fax

bPress Start.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Receiving faxes into memory

when the paper tray is empty

(black & white only) 6

As soon as the paper tray becomes empty

during fax reception, the LCD shows

No Paper and begins receiving faxes into

the machine’s memory. Put some paper in

the paper tray. (See Loading paper and print

media on page 11.)

The machine will carry on receiving the fax,

with the remaining pages being stored in

memory, if enough memory is available.

Further incoming faxes will also be stored into

memory until the memory is full. When the

memory is full the machine will stop

automatically answering calls. To print the

faxes, put fresh paper in the tray and press

Black Start or Color Start.

Telephone line

services 7

Voice Mail 7

If you have Voice Mail on the same telephone

line as your Brother machine, Voice Mail and

the Brother machine will conflict with each

other when receiving incoming calls.

For example, if your Voice Mail is set to

answer after 4 rings and your Brother

machine is set to answer after 2 rings, then

your Brother machine will answer first. This

will prevent callers from being able to leave a

message in your Voice Mail.

Similarly, if your Brother machine is set to

answer after 4 rings and your Voice Mail is set

to answer after 2 rings, then your Voice Mail

will answer first. This will prevent your Brother

machine from being able to receive an

incoming fax, since Voice Mail cannot

transfer the incoming fax back to the Brother

machine.

To avoid conflicts between your Brother

machine and your Voice Mail service, do one

of the following:

Get the Distinctive Ring service from your

telephone company. Distinctive Ring is a

feature of your Brother machine that allows a

person with one line to receive fax and voice

calls through two different telephone

numbers on that one line. Brother uses the

term ’Distinctive Ring,’ but telephone

companies market the service under a variety

of names, such as Custom Ringing,

Personalized Ring, Smart Ring, RingMaster,

Ident-A-Ring, Ident-A-Call, Data Ident-A-Call,

Teen Ring, and SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate

Number Ringing. This service establishes a

second telephone number on the same line

as your existing telephone number, and each

number has its own ring pattern. Typically,

the original number rings with the standard

ring pattern and is used for receiving voice

calls, and the second number rings with a

different ring pattern and is used for receiving

faxes. (See Distinctive Ring on page 54.)

Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to

"Manual". Manual Mode requires that you

answer every incoming call if you want to be

able to receive a fax. If the incoming call is a

telephone call, then complete the call as you

normally would. If you hear fax sending tones

you must transfer the call to the Brother

machine. (See Using external and extension

telephones on page 60.) Unanswered fax

and voice calls will go to your Voice Mail. (To

set the machine in MANUAL Mode, see

Choose the correct Receive Mode

on page 46.)

Telephone services and external

devices 7

Chapter 7

Distinctive Ring 7

Distinctive Ring is a function of your Brother

machine that allows a person with one line to

receive fax and voice calls through two

different phone numbers on that one line.

Brother uses the term "Distinctive Ring," but

telephone companies market the service

under a variety of names, such as Smart

Ring, Ring Master or Ident-a-Ring. This

service establishes a second telephone

number on the same line as your existing

telephone number, and each number has its

own ring pattern. Typically, the original

number rings with the standard ring pattern

and is used for receiving voice calls, and the

second number rings with a different ring

pattern and is used for receiving faxes.

Note

• You must pay for your telephone

company's Distinctive Ring service before

you program the machine to work with it.

• Please call your telephone company for

availability and rates.

What does your telephone company’s

‘Distinctive Ring’ do? 7

Your telephone company’s Distinctive Ring

service allows you to have more than one

number on the same telephone line. If you

need more than one telephone number, it

is cheaper than paying for an extra line.

Each telephone number has its own

distinctive ring pattern, so you will know

which telephone number is ringing. This is

one way you can have a separate telephone

number for your machine.

Note

Please call your telephone company for

availability and rates.

What does Brother’s ‘distinctive ring’

do? 7

The Brother machine has a Distinctive Ring

feature that allows you to use your machine to

take full advantage of the telephone

company’s Distinctive Ring service. The new

telephone number on your line can just

receive faxes.

Note

You must pay for your telephone

company’s Distinctive Ring service before

you program the machine to work with it.

Do you have Voice Mail? 7

If you have Voice Mail on the telephone line

that you will install your new machine on,

there is a strong possibility that Voice Mail

and the machine will conflict with each other

while receiving incoming calls. However, the

Distinctive Ring feature allows you to use

more than one number on your line, so

both Voice Mail and the machine can work

together without any problems. If each one

has a separate telephone number, neither will

interfere with the other’s operations.

If you decide to get the Distinctive Ring

service from the telephone company, you will

need to follow the directions below to

‘register’ the new Distinctive Ring pattern

they give you. This is so your machine can

recognize its incoming calls.

Note

You can change or cancel the Distinctive

Ring pattern at any time. You can switch it

off temporarily, and turn it back on later.

When you get a new fax number, make

sure you reset this feature.

Telephone services and external devices

Before you choose the ring pattern to

You can only register one Distinctive Ring

pattern with the machine. Some ring patterns

cannot be registered. The ring patterns below

are supported by your Brother machine.

gives you.

Note

• Ring Pattern #1 is often called Short-Short

and is the most commonly used.

• If the ring pattern you received is not on

this chart, please call your telephone

company and ask for one that is

shown.

The machine will only answer calls to its

registered number.

The first two rings are silent on the

machine. This is because the fax must

<<listen>> to the ring pattern (to compare

it to the pattern that was ‘registered’).

(Other telephones on the same line will

ring.)

If you program the machine properly, it will

recognize the registered ring pattern of the

‘fax number’ within 2 ring patterns and

then answer with a fax tone. When the

‘voice number’ is called, the machine will

not answer.

Registering the distinctive ring pattern

Very important! 7

After you have set the Distinctive Ring feature

to On, your Distinctive Ring number will

receive faxes automatically. The receive

mode is automatically set to Manual and you

cannot change it to another receive mode

while Distinctive Ring is set to On. This

ensures the Brother machine will only answer

the Distinctive Ring number and not interfere

when your main telephone number is called.

aPress Menu, 2, 0, 2.

Miscellaneous

2.Distinctive

bPress a or b to choose Set.

cPress OK.

dPress a or b to choose the prestored ring

pattern you want to use.

Press OK.

e(You will hear each pattern as you scroll

through the four patterns. Make sure

you choose the pattern that the

telephone company gave you.)

fPress Stop/Exit.

Distinctive Ring is now set to On.

Ring

Pattern Rings

1 long-long

2 short-long-short

3 short-short-long

4 very long

(normal pattern)

Chapter 7

Turning off distinctive ring 7

aPress Menu, 2, 0, 2.

Miscellaneous

2.Distinctive

bPress a or b to choose Off.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Note

If you do not want to receive faxes on your

Distinctive Ring number, you can turn off

Distinctive Ring. The machine will stay in

Manual receive mode so you will need to

set the Receive Mode again. (See Choose

the correct Receive Mode on page 46.)

Caller ID 7

The Caller ID feature lets you use the Caller

ID subscriber service offered by many local

telephone companies. Call your telephone

company for details. This service shows the

telephone number, or name if it is available,

of your caller as the line rings.

After a few rings, the LCD will show the

telephone number of your caller (and name, if

available). Once you answer a call, the Caller

ID information disappears from the LCD, but

the call information stays stored in the Caller

ID memory.

You will see the first 16 characters of the

number (or name).

The # Unavailable message means

the call originated outside your Caller ID

service area.

The Private Call message means the

caller has intentionally blocked

transmission of information.

You can print a list of the Caller ID information

received by your machine. (See Printing the

Caller ID List on page 57.)

Note

Caller ID service varies with different

carriers. Call your local telephone

company to find out about the kind of

service available in your area.

Telephone services and external devices

Viewing the Caller ID List 7

Your machine stores information for the last

thirty calls in the Caller ID list. You can view

or print this list. When the thirty-first call

comes in to the machine, it replaces

information about the first call.

aPress Menu, 2, 0, 3.

Miscellaneous

3.Caller ID

bPress a or b to choose Display#.

Press OK.

The Caller ID of the last call will appear

on the display. If no ID is stored, the

beeper will sound and No Caller ID

will appear on the display.

cPress a or b to scroll through the Caller

ID memory to choose the Caller ID you

want to view, and then press OK.

The LCD will show the caller's number

or name and the date and time of the

call.

dTo finish viewing, press Stop/Exit.

Printing the Caller ID List 7

aPress Menu, 2, 0, 3.

Miscellaneous

3.Caller ID

bPress a or b to choose Print Report.

Press OK.

If no ID is stored, the beeper will sound

and No Caller ID will appear on the

LCD.

cPress Black Start or Color Start.

dAfter printing has finished,

press Stop/Exit.

Connecting an external

TAD (telephone

answering device) 7

You can connect an external Telephone

Answering Device (TAD) to the same line as

your machine. When the TAD answers a call,

your machine will “listen” for the CNG (fax

calling) tones sent by a sending fax machine.

If it hears them it will take over the call and

receive the fax. If it does not hear them, it will

let your TAD take a voice message and the

display will show Telephone.

The external TAD must answer within four

rings (we recommend you set it to two rings).

This is because your machine cannot hear

the CNG tones until the external TAD has

picked up the call. The sending machine will

send CNG tones for only eight to ten seconds

longer. We do not recommend using the toll

saver feature on your external TAD if it needs

more than four rings to activate it.

Unless you are using Distinctive Ring, the

TAD must be connected to the EXT. jack of

the machine.

Before you connect an external TAD

(telephone answering device), remove the

protective cap (2) from the EXT. jack on the

machine.

1TAD

2 Protective Cap

Note

If you have problems receiving faxes,

reduce the ring delay setting on your

external TAD.

Chapter 7

Connections 7

The external TAD must be plugged into the

back of the machine, into the jack labeled

EXT. Your machine cannot work properly if

you plug the TAD into a wall jack (unless you

are using Distinctive Ring).

aPlug the telephone line cord from the

telephone wall jack into the back of the

machine, in the jack labeled LINE.

bPlug the telephone line cord from your

external TAD into the back of the

machine, in the jack labeled EXT. (Make

sure this cord is connected to the TAD at

the TAD’s telephone line jack, and not

its handset jack.)

cSet your external TAD to four rings or

less. (The machine’s Ring Delay setting

does not apply.)

dRecord the outgoing message on your

external TAD.

eSet the TAD to answer calls.

fSet the Receive Mode to

External TAD. (See Choose the

correct Receive Mode on page 46.)

Recording an outgoing

message (OGM) 7

aRecord 5 seconds of silence at the

beginning of your message. This allows

your machine time to listen for fax tones.

bLimit your speaking to 20 seconds.

cEnd your 20-second message by giving

your Fax Receive Code for people

sending manual faxes. For example:

“After the beep, leave a message or

press l51 and Start to send a fax.”

Note

We recommend beginning your OGM with

an initial 5 second silence because the

machine cannot hear fax tones over a loud

voice. You may try leaving out this pause,

but if your machine has trouble receiving,

then you should re-record the OGM to

include it.

Telephone services and external devices

Special line considerations 7

Roll over telephone lines 7

A roll over telephone system is a group of two

or more separate telephone lines that pass

incoming calls to each other if they are busy.

The calls are usually passed down or “rolled

over” to the next available telephone line in a

preset order.

Your machine can work in a roll over system

as long as it is the last number in the

sequence, so the call cannot roll away. Do not

put the machine on any of the other numbers;

when the other lines are busy and a second

fax call is received, the fax call would be

transferred to a line that does not have a fax

machine. Your machine will work best on a

dedicated line.

Two-line telephone system 7

A two-line telephone system is nothing more

than two separate telephone numbers on the

same wall outlet. The two telephone numbers

can be on separate jacks (RJ11) or combined

into one jack (RJ14). Your machine must be

plugged into an RJ11 jack. RJ11 and RJ14

jacks may be equal in size and appearance

and both may contain four wires (black, red,

green, yellow). To test the type of jack, plug in

a two-line telephone and see if it can access

both lines. If it can, you must separate the line

for your machine. (See Easy Receive

on page 50.)

Converting telephone wall outlets 7

There are three ways to convert to an RJ11

jack. The first two ways may require

assistance from the telephone company. You

can change the wall outlets from one RJ14

jack to two RJ11 jacks. Or, you can have an

RJ11 wall outlet installed and slave or jump

one of the telephone numbers to it.

The third way is the easiest: Buy a triplex

adapter. You can plug a triplex adapter into

an RJ14 outlet. It separates the wires into two

separate RJ11 jacks (Line 1, Line 2) and a

third RJ14 jack (Lines 1 and 2). If your

machine is on Line 1, plug the machine into

L1 of the triplex adapter. If your machine is on

Line 2, plug it into L2 of the triple adapter.

Installing machine, external two-line

TAD and two-line telephone 7

When you are installing an external two-line

telephone answering device (TAD) and a

two-line telephone, your machine must be

isolated on one line at both the wall jack and

at the TAD. The most common connection is

to put the machine on Line 2, which is

explained in the following steps. The back of

the two-line TAD must have two telephone

jacks: one labeled L1 or L1/L2, and the other

labeled L2. You will need at least three

telephone line cords, the one that came with

your machine and two for your external

two-line TAD. You will need a fourth line cord

if you add a two-line telephone.

Place the two-line TAD and the two-line

telephone next to your machine.

Plug one end of the telephone line cord for

your machine into the L2 jack of the triplex

adapter. Plug the other end into the LINE jack

on the back of the machine.

Plug one end of the first telephone line cord

for your TAD into the L1 jack of the triplex

adapter. Plug the other end into the L1 or

L1/L2 jack of the two-line TAD.

RJ14

RJ11

RJ14

Chapter 7

Plug one end of the second telephone line

cord for your TAD into the L2 jack of the

two-line TAD. Plug the other end into the

EXT. jack on the left side of the machine.

1 Triplex Adapter

2 Two Line Telephone

3 External Two Line TAD

4 Machine

You can keep two-line telephones on other

wall outlets as always. There are two ways to

add a two-line telephone to the machine’s

wall outlet. You can plug the telephone line

cord from the two-line telephone into the

L1+L2 jack of the triplex adapter. Or, you can

plug the two-line telephone into the TEL jack

of the two-line TAD.

Multi-line connections (PBX) 7

We suggest you ask the company who

installed your PBX to connect your machine.

If you have a multi line system we suggest

you ask the installer to connect the unit to the

last line on the system. This prevents the

machine being activated each time the

system receives telephone calls. If all

incoming calls will be answered by a

switchboard operator we recommend that

you set the Receive Mode to Manual.

We cannot guarantee that your machine will

operate properly under all circumstances

when connected to a PBX. Any difficulties

with sending or receiving faxes should be

reported first to the company who handles

your PBX.

External and extension

telephones 7

Using external and extension

telephones 7

Using extension telephones 7

If you answer a fax call at an extension

telephone, you can make your machine

receive the fax by pressing the Fax Receive

Code l51.

If the machine answers a voice call and

pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you

can take the call at an extension telephone by

pressing the Telephone Answer Code #51.

(See F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)

on page 49.)

Using an external telephone

(Connected to the EXT. jack of the

machine) 7

If you answer a fax call at the external

telephone connected to the EXT jack of the

machine, you can make the machine receive

the fax by pressing Black Start and choosing

Receive.

If the machine answers a voice call and

pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you

can take the call at the external telephone by

pressing Hook.

If you answer a call and no one is on

the line: 7

You should assume that you’re receiving a

manual fax.

Press l51 and wait for the chirp or until the

LCD shows Receiving, and then hang up.

Note

You can also use the Easy Receive

feature to make your machine

automatically take the call. (See Easy

Receive on page 50.)

Telephone services and external devices

For Fax/Tel mode only 7

When the machine is in Fax/Tel mode, it will

use the F/T Ring Time

(pseudo/double-ringing) to alert you to pick

up a voice call.

Lift the external telephone’s handset, and

then press Hook to answer.

If you are at an extension telephone, you will

need to lift the handset during the F/T Ring

Time and then press #51 between the

pseudo/double rings. If no one is on the line,

or if someone wants to send you a fax, send

the call back to the machine by pressing l51.

Connecting an external or

extension telephone 7

You can connect a separate telephone

directly to your machine as shown in the

diagram below.

Connect the telephone line cord to the jack

labeled EXT.

Before you connect an external telephone,

remove the protective cap (3) from the EXT.

jack on the machine.

1 Extension telephone

2 External telephone

3 Protective Cap

When you are using an external telephone,

the LCD shows Telephone.

Using a non-Brother cordless

external handset 7

If your non-Brother cordless telephone is

connected to the EXT. jack of the machine

(see page 61) and you typically carry the

cordless handset elsewhere, it is easier to

answer calls during the Ring Delay.

If you let the machine answer first, you will

have to go to the machine so you can press

Hook to transfer the call to the cordless

handset.

Using Remote Codes 7

Fax Receive Code 7

If you answer a fax call on an extension

telephone, you can tell your machine to

receive it by pressing the Fax Receive

Code l51. Wait for the chirping sounds then

replace the handset. (See Easy Receive

on page 50.)

If you answer a fax call at the external

telephone, you can make the machine

receive the fax by pressing Start.

Telephone Answer Code 7

If you receive a voice call and the machine is

in F/T mode, it will start to sound the F/T

(double-ring) after the initial ring delay. If you

pick up the call on an extension telephone

you can turn the F/T ring off by pressing #51

(make sure you press this between the rings).

If the machine answers a voice call and

pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you

can take the call at the external telephone by

pressing Hook.

Chapter 7

Changing the Remote Codes 7

The preset Fax Receive Code is l51. The

preset Telephone Answer Code is #51. If you

are always disconnected when accessing

your External TAD, try changing the

three-digit remote codes, for example ###

and 999.

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bPress Menu, 2, 1, 4.

Setup Receive

4.Remote Codes

cPress a or b to choose On (or Off).

Press OK.

dIf you chose On in step c, enter the new

Fax Receive Code.

Press OK.

eEnter the new Telephone Answer Code.

Press OK.

fPress Stop/Exit.

How to dial 8

You can dial in any of the following ways.

Manual dialing 8

Use the dial pad to enter all the digits of the

telephone or fax number.

One touch dialing 8

Press the One Touch key that stores the

number you want to call. (See Storing

One Touch Dial numbers on page 65.)

To dial One Touch numbers 5 to 8, hold down

Shift as you press the One Touch key.

Speed dialing 8

Press (Address Book) and then the three

digit Speed Dial number. (See Storing Speed

Dial numbers on page 66.)

Note

If the LCD shows Register Now? when

you enter a One Touch or a Speed Dial

number, it means that a number is not

stored there.

Dialing and storing numbers 8

Three-digit number

Chapter 8

Search 8

You can search alphabetically for names you

have stored in the One Touch and Speed Dial

memories. (See Storing One Touch Dial

numbers on page 65 and Storing Speed Dial

numbers on page 66.)

aPress (Address Book) twice.

bPress the dial pad key for the first few

letters of the name. (Use the chart on

Entering text on page 219 to help you

enter letters.)

Press OK.

cPress a or b to scroll until you find the

name you are looking for.

Press OK.

dPress Black Start or Color Start.

Note

• If you do not enter a letter and press OK in

step b, all registered names will appear.

Press a or b to scroll until you find the

name you are looking for.

• If the LCD shows No Contact Found

when you enter the first few letters of the

name, it means that a name for the letter

is not stored.

Fax redial 8

If you are sending a fax manually and the line

is busy, press Redial/Pause, wait for the

other fax machine to answer, and then press

Black Start or Color Start to try again. If you

want to make a second call to the last number

dialed, you can save time by pressing

Redial/Pause and Black Start or

Color Start.

Redial/Pause only works if you dialed from

the control panel.

If you are sending a fax automatically and the

line is busy, the machine will automatically

redial one time after five minutes.

Storing numbers 8

You can set up your machine to do the

following types of easy dialing: One Touch,

Speed Dial and Groups for Broadcasting

faxes. You can also specify the default

resolution for each One Touch and Speed

Dial number. When you dial a quick dial

number, the LCD shows the name, if you

stored it, or the number. A scan profile can

also be stored along with the fax number.

If you lose electrical power, the quick dial

numbers stored in the memory will not be lost.

A scan profile is the resolution and other scan

settings that you choose when you store a

number. For example, you will be asked to

select Standard, Fine, or Photo if you have

selected the I-FAX option. Or, you will be

asked to select B&W 200 dpi,

B&W 200x100 dpi, Gray 100dpi, Gray 200dpi,

Gray 300dpi, Color 100 dpi, Color 200 dpi,

Color 300dpi or Color 600 dpi if you selected

the E-Mail option. (I-FAX, Fax/Tel and E-mail

options are available as a download.)

Storing a pause 8

Press Redial/Pause to insert a 3.5-second

pause between numbers. You can press

Redial/Pause as many times as needed to

increase the length of the pause.

Dialing and storing numbers

Storing One Touch Dial

numbers 8

Your machine has 4 One Touch keys where

you can store 8 fax or telephone numbers for

automatic dialing. To access numbers 5 to 8,

hold down Shift as you press the One Touch

key.

aPress the One Touch key where you

want to store the number.

If a number is not stored there, the LCD

shows Register Now?.

Press 1 to choose Yes.

bEnter the telephone or fax number (up to

20 characters).

Press OK.

cChoose one of the following:

Enter the name using the dial pad

(up to 15 characters). Use the chart

on Entering text on page 219 to help

you enter letters.

Press OK.

Press OK to store the number

without a name.

dIf you want to save a fax resolution along

with the number, choose one of the

following:

To store the fax resolution, press a or

b to select Std, Fine, S.Fine or

Photo.

Press OK.

Press OK if you don't want to change

the default resolution.

If you downloaded I-FAX, Fax/Tel and

E-mail options

aPress the One Touch key where you

want to store the number.

If a number is not stored there, the LCD

shows Register Now?.

Press 1 to choose Yes.

bPress a or b to select Fax/Tel, E-Mail

or IFAX.

Press OK.

cChoose one of the following:

Enter the telephone or fax number

(up to 20 characters) if you selected

Fax/Tel.

Press OK.

Enter the E-mail address (up to

60 characters) if you selected

E-Mail or IFAX. Use the chart on

Entering text on page 219 to help

you enter letters.

Press OK.

Note

If you selected E-Mail and save the

E-mail address, you can only use the

E-mail address when you are in Scan

mode. If you selected IFAX and save the

E-mail address, you can only use the

E-mail address when you are in Fax

mode.

dChoose one of the following:

Enter the name using the dial pad

(up to 15 characters).

Press OK.

Press OK to store the number or

E-mail address without a name.

Chapter 8

eIf you want to save a fax/scan resolution

along with the number, choose one of

the following:

If you selected Fax/Tel in step b,

press a or b to select Std, Fine,

S.Fine or Photo.

Press OK.

If you selected E-Mail in step b,

press a or b to select Color100dpi,

Color200dpi, Color300dpi,

Color600dpi, Gray100dpi,

Gray200dpi, Gray300dpi,

B&W200dpi or B&W200x100.

Press OK and then go to step f.

If you selected IFAX in step b, press

a or b to select Std, Fine or Photo.

Press OK.

Press OK if you don't want to change

the default resolution.

fIf you selected Black & White in step e,

select the file format (TIFF, PDF or

Secure PDF) that will be used to send to

your PC. If you selected Gray or Color in

step e, select the file format (PDF,

Secure PDF, JPEG, or XPS) that will be

used to send to your PC.

Press OK.

Note

• When you do a broadcast and you have

saved a scan profile along with the

number or E-mail address, the scan profile

of the One-Touch, Speed-Dial or Group

number you chose first will be applied to

the broadcast.

• You can also store the number by

pressing Menu, 2, 3, 1.

Storing Speed Dial numbers 8

You can store your frequently used numbers

as Speed Dial numbers, so that when you dial

you will only have to press a few keys

((Address Book), the three-digit number

and Black Start or Color Start). The

machine can store 200 Speed Dial numbers

(001 - 200).

aPress (Address Book) and enter a

three-digit Speed Dial location number

(001-200).

If a number is not stored there, the LCD

shows Register Now?

Press 1 to choose Yes.

bEnter the telephone or fax number (up to

20 characters).

Press OK.

cChoose one of the following:

Enter the name using the dial pad

(up to 15 characters). Use the chart

on Entering text on page 219 to help

you enter letters.

Press OK.

Press OK to store the number

without a name.

dIf you want to save a fax resolution along

with the number, choose one of the

following:

To store the fax resolution, press a or

b to select Std, Fine, S.Fine or

Photo.

Press OK.

Press OK if you don't want to change

the default resolution.

Dialing and storing numbers

If you downloaded I-FAX, Fax/Tel and

E-mail options

aPress (Address Book) and enter a

three-digit Speed Dial location number

(001-200).

If a number is not stored there, the LCD

shows Register Now?

Press 1 to choose Yes.

bPress a or b to select Fax/Tel, E-Mail

or IFAX.

Press OK.

cChoose one of the following:

Enter the telephone or fax number

(up to 20 characters) if you selected

Fax/Tel.

Press OK.

Enter the E-mail address (up to

60 characters) if you selected

E-Mail or IFAX. Use the chart on

Entering text on page 219 to help

you enter letters.

Press OK.

Note

If you selected E-Mail and save the

E-mail address, you can only use the

E-mail address when you are in Scan

mode. If you selected IFAX and save the

E-mail address, you can only use the

E-mail address when you are in Fax

mode.

dChoose one of the following:

Enter the name using the dial pad

(up to 15 characters).

Press OK.

Press OK to store the number or

E-mail address without a name.

eIf you want to save a fax/scan resolution

along with the number, choose one of

the following:

If you selected Fax/Tel in step b,

press a or b to select Std, Fine,

S.Fine or Photo.

Press OK.

If you selected E-Mail in step b,

press a or b to select Color100dpi,

Color200dpi, Color300dpi,

Color600dpi, Gray100dpi,

Gray200dpi, Gray300dpi,

B&W200dpi or B&W200x100.

Press OK and then go to step f.

If you selected IFAX in step b, press

a or b to select Std, Fine or Photo.

Press OK.

Press OK if you don't want to change

the default resolution.

fIf you selected Black & White in step e,

select the file format (TIFF, PDF or

Secure PDF) that will be used to send to

your PC. If you selected Gray or Color in

step e, select the file format (PDF,

Secure PDF, JPEG, or XPS) that will be

used to send your PC.

Press OK.

Note

• When you do a broadcast and you have

saved a scan profile along with the

number or E-mail address, the scan profile

of the One-Touch, Speed-Dial or Group

number you chose first will be applied to

the broadcast.

• You can also store the number by

pressing Menu, 2, 3, 1.

Chapter 8

Changing One Touch and

Speed Dial numbers 8

If you try to store a One Touch or Speed Dial

number over an existing number, the LCD will

show the name or number already stored

there. If your machine has a scheduled job or

you have set a fax forwarding number, the

LCD will ask you if you want to change the

number.

aDo one of the following:

To change a stored One Touch

number, press Menu, 2, 3, 1.

Press OK.

One Touch Dial

Select One Touch

Choose the One Touch number you

want to change.

To change a stored Speed Dial

number, press Menu, 2, 3, 2.

Press OK.

Speed Dial

Speed Dial? #

Choose the Speed Dial number you

want to change then press OK.

bDo one of the following:

To change the stored number,

press 1.

To exit without making a change,

press 2.

#005:MIKE

1.Change 2.Exit

cEnter a new number.

Press OK.

dPress d or c to position the cursor under

the character you want to change, and

then press Clear/Back to delete it.

Repeat for each character you want to

delete.

eIf you want to save a fax resolution along

with the number, one of the following:

To store the fax resolution, press a or

b to select Std, Fine, S.Fine or

Photo.

Press OK.

Press OK if you don't want to change

the default resolution.

fPress Stop/Exit.

If you downloaded I-FAX, Fax/Tel and

E-mail options

aDo one of the following:

To change a stored One Touch

number, press Menu, 2, 3, 1.

Press OK.

One Touch Dial

Select One Touch

Choose the One Touch number you

want to change.

To change a stored Speed Dial

number, press Menu, 2, 3, 2.

Press OK.

Speed Dial

Speed Dial? #

Choose the Speed Dial number you

want to change then press OK.

bDo one of the following:

To change the stored number,

press 1.

To exit without making a change,

press 2.

#005:MIKE

1.Change 2.Exit

cPress a or b to select Fax/Tel, E-Mail

or IFAX.

Press OK.

dEnter a new number or character.

Press OK.

Dialing and storing numbers

ePress d or c to position the cursor under

the character you want to change, and

then press Clear/Back to delete it.

Repeat for each character you want to

delete.

fFollow the directions beginning in

step e in Storing One-Touch dial

numbers and Storing Speed-Dial

numbers. (See Storing One Touch Dial

numbers on page 65 and Storing Speed

Dial numbers on page 66.)

Setting up Groups for

Broadcasting 8

If you often want to send the same fax

message to many fax numbers you can set

up a group.

Groups are stored on a One Touch key or a

Speed Dial number. Each group uses up a

One Touch key or a Speed Dial location. You

can then send the fax message to all the

numbers stored in a group just by pressing a

One Touch key or entering a Speed Dial

number, and then pressing Black Start.

Before you can add numbers to a group, you

need to store them as One Touch or Speed

Dial numbers. You can have up to 20 small

groups, or you can assign up to 207 numbers

to one large group.

aPress Menu, 2, 3, 3.

Address Book

3.Setup Groups

bChoose the One Touch key or Speed

Dial location where you want to store the

group.

Press a One Touch key.

Press (Address Book) and then

enter the three-digit Speed Dial

location.

Press OK.

cUse the dial pad to enter a group

number (01 to 20).

Press OK.

dTo add One Touch or Speed Dial

numbers follow the instructions below:

For One Touch numbers, press the

One Touch keys one after the other.

For Speed Dial numbers, press

(Address Book) and then enter

the three-digit Speed Dial location.

The LCD will display your chosen One

Touch numbers with a l and Speed Dial

numbers with a # (for example l006,

#009).

ePress OK when you have finished

adding numbers.

fDo one of the following:

Enter the name using the dial pad

(up to 15 characters). Use the chart

on Entering text on page 219 to help

you enter letters.

Press OK.

Press OK to store the group without

a name.

gIf you want to save a fax resolution along

with the number, choose one of the

options below:

To store the fax resolution, press a or

b to select Std, Fine, S.Fine or

Photo.

Press OK.

Press OK if you do not want to

change the default resolution.

hDo one of the following:

To store another group for

broadcasting, go to step b.

To finish storing groups for

broadcasting, press Stop/Exit.

Chapter 8

If you downloaded I-FAX, Fax/Tel and

E-mail options

aPress Menu, 2, 3, 3.

Address Book

3.Setup Groups

bChoose an empty location where you

want to store the group in one of the

following ways:

Press a One Touch key.

Press (Address Book) and then

enter the three-digit Speed Dial

location.

Press OK.

cUse the dial pad to enter a group

number (01 to 20).

Press OK.

dPress a or b to select Fax/IFAX or

E-Mail.

Press OK.

eTo add One Touch or Speed Dial

numbers follow the instructions below:

For One Touch numbers, press the

One Touch keys one after the other.

For Speed Dial numbers, press

(Address Book) and then enter

the three-digit Speed Dial location.

The LCD will display your chosen One

Touch numbers with a l and Speed Dial

numbers with a # (for example l006,

#009).

fPress OK when you have finished

adding numbers.

gDo one of the following:

Enter the name using the dial pad

(up to 15 characters). Use the chart

on Entering text on page 219 to help

you enter letters.

Press OK.

Press OK to store the group without

a name.

hYou can save a fax/scan resolution

along with the number. Do one of the

following:

If you selected Fax/IFAX in step d,

press a or b to select Std, Fine,

S.Fine or Photo.

Press OK.

If you selected E-mail in step d,

press a or b to select Color100dpi,

Color200dpi, Color300dpi,

Color600dpi, Gray100dpi,

Gray200dpi, Gray300dpi,

B&W200dpi or B&W200x100.

Press OK.

Press OK if you don't want to change

the default resolution.

Note

If you have selected Fax/IFAX in step d

and added One-Touch or Speed-Dial

numbers that are stored as 'I-Fax', you

cannot select S.Fine.

iIf you selected Black & White in step h,

select the file format (TIFF, PDF or

Secure PDF) that will be used to send to

your PC. If you selected Gray or Color in

step h, select the file format (PDF,

Secure PDF, JPEG or XPS) that will be

used to send your PC.

Press OK.

Note

Fax Broadcasting is for black & white only.

Dialing and storing numbers

Dialing access codes and

credit card numbers 8

You can combine more than one Quick Dial

number when you dial. This feature may be

useful if you need to dial an access code for

a cheaper rate from another long distance

carrier.

For example, you might have stored ‘555’ on

Speed Dial #003 and ‘7000’ on Speed Dial

#002. You can use them both to dial

‘555-7000’ if you press the following keys:

Press (Address Book), 003.

Press (Address Book), 002 and

Black Start or Color Start.

Numbers can be added manually by entering

them on the dial pad:

Press (Address Book), 003, 7001 (on the

dial pad), and Black Start or Color Start.

This would dial ‘555–7001’. You can also add

a pause by pressing Redial/Pause key.

Pause 8

Press Redial/Pause to insert a 3.5-second

pause between numbers. You can press

Redial/Pause as many times as needed to

increase the length of the pause.

Tone or Pulse (Canada only) 8

If you have a Pulse dialing service, but need

to send Tone signals (for example, for

telephone banking), follow the instructions

below. If you have Touch Tone service, you

will not need this feature to send tone signals.

aPress Hook.

bPress # on the machine’s control panel.

Any digits dialed after this will send tone

signals.

When you hang up, the machine will

return to the Pulse dialing service.

Remote Fax Options ARE NOT available for

color fax.

Remote Fax Options let you receive faxes

while you are away from the machine.

You can use only one Remote Fax Option at

a time.

Fax Forwarding 9

The Fax Forwarding feature lets you

automatically forward your received faxes to

another machine.

aPress Menu, 2, 5, 1.

Remote Fax Opt

1.Fwd/Page/Store

bPress a or b to choose Fax Forward.

Press OK.

The LCD will ask you to enter the fax

number you want your faxes to be

forwarded to.

cEnter the forwarding number using the

dial pad (up to 20 digits), using a

One Touch key or press

(Address Book) and the three-digit

location.

Press OK.

Note

• If you store a group on a One Touch key

or a Speed Dial location, the faxes will be

forwarded to several fax numbers.

• You can also enter an E-mail address if

your machine has been configured for the

Internet Fax feature. (For details about

Internet Fax, see the Network User’s

Guide on the CD-ROM.

dPress a or b to choose On or Off.

Press OK.

Backup Print

ePress Stop/Exit.

IMPORTANT

If you choose Backup Print On, the

machine will also print the fax at your

machine so you will have a copy. This is a

safety feature in case there is a power

failure before the fax is forwarded or a

problem at the receiving machine. The

machine can store faxes for

approximately 60 hours if there is a power

failure.

Remote Fax Options

(black & white only) 9

Remote Fax Options (black & white only)

Paging 9

When Paging is chosen, the machine dials

the cell phone number you programmed. This

activates your cell phone or pager so you will

know that you have a fax message in the

machine’s memory.

aPress Menu, 2, 5, 1.

Remote Fax Opt

1.Fwd/Page/Store

bPress a or b to choose Paging.

Press OK.

cEnter your cell phone number followed

by # # (up to 20 digits).Press OK.

Do not include the area code if it is the

same as that of your machine.

For example, press

1 8 0 0 5 5 5 1 2 3 4 # #.

dDo one of the following:

If you pager needs a PIN, enter the

PIN, press #, press Redial/Pause,

enter your fax number followed by

##. Press OK. (For example, press:

1 2 3 4 5 # Redial/Pause 1 8 0 0 5 5

5 6 7 8 9 # #)

If you do not need a PIN, press OK.

If you are programming a cell phone

number, press OK.

ePress Stop/Exit.

Note

• If you have set Paging, a backup copy will

automatically be printed at the machine.

• You cannot change a Paging or PIN

number remotely.

Fax Storage 9

The Fax Storage feature lets you store your

received faxes in the machine’s memory. You

can retrieve stored fax messages from a fax

machine at another location using the remote

retrieval commands. (See Retrieving fax

messages on page 77.) Your machine will

automatically print a copy of the stored fax.

aPress Menu, 2, 5, 1.

Remote Fax Opt

1.Fwd/Page/Store

bPress a or b to choose Fax Storage.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Note

If Fax Storage is turned on your

machine cannot receive a color fax unless

the sending machine converts it to black &

white.

Chapter 9

PC Fax Receive 9

If you turn on the PC Fax Receive feature

your machine will store received faxes in

memory and send them to your PC

automatically. You can then use your PC to

view and store these faxes.

Even if you have turned off your PC (at night

or on the weekend, for example), your

machine will receive and store your faxes in

its memory. The LCD will show the number of

stored faxes received, for example:

PC Fax Msg:001

When you start your PC and the PC Fax

Receiving software runs, your machine

transfers your faxes to your PC automatically.

For PC Fax Receive to work you must have

the PC-FAX Receive software running on

your PC. (For details, see PC-FAX receiving

in the Software User’s Guide on the

CD-ROM.)

If you choose Backup Print On, the machine

will also print the fax.

aPress Menu, 2, 5, 1.

Remote Fax Opt

1.Fwd/Page/Store

bPress a or b to choose

PC Fax Receive.

Press OK.

cPress a or b to choose <USB> or your

computer name if the machine is

connected to a network.

Select ab or OK

<USB>

Press OK.

dPress a or b to choose On or Off.

Backup Print

Off

Press OK.

ePress Stop/Exit.

IMPORTANT

If you choose Backup Print On, the

machine will also print the fax at your

machine so you will have a copy. This is a

safety feature in case there is a power

failure before the fax is forwarded or a

problem at the receiving machine. The

machine can store faxes for

approximately 60 hours if there is a power

failure.

Note

• Before you can set up PC Fax Receive

you must install the MFL-Pro Suite

software on your PC. Make sure your PC

is connected and turned on. (For details

see PC-FAX receiving in the Software

User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

• If your machine has a problem and is

unable to print faxes in memory, you can

use this setting to transfer your faxes to a

PC. (For details, see Error and

maintenance messages on page 144.)

• PC Fax Receive is not supported in Mac

OS. (See PC-FAX receiving in the

Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

Remote Fax Options (black & white only)

Changing Remote Fax

Options 9

If received faxes are left in your machine’s

memory when you change to another

Remote Fax Option, the LCD will ask you the

following message:

Erase All Fax?

1.Yes 2.No

Print All Fax?

1.Yes 2.No

If you press 1, faxes in the memory will be

erased or printed before the setting

changes. If a backup copy has already

been printed it will not be printed again.

If you press 2, faxes in the memory will not

be erased or printed and the setting will be

unchanged.

If received faxes are left in the machine’s

memory when you change to

PC Fax Receive from another remote fax

option (Fax Forward, Paging or

Fax Storage), the LCD will ask you the

following message:

Send Fax to PC?

1.Yes 2.No

If you press 1, faxes in the memory will be

sent to your PC before the setting

changes. Faxes in the memory will be sent

to your PC when the PC Fax Receive icon

is active on your PC. (See the Software

User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

The LCD will ask you the following

message:

Backup Print

Off

Press a or b to choose On or Off.

Press OK.

Press Stop/Exit.

If you press 2, faxes in the memory will not

be erased or transferred to your PC and

the setting will be unchanged.

IMPORTANT

If you choose Backup Print On, the

machine will also print the fax at your

machine so you will have a copy. This is a

safety feature in case there is a power

failure before the fax is forwarded or a

problem at the receiving machine. The

machine can store faxes for

approximately 60 hours if there is a power

failure.

Turning off Remote Fax

Options 9

aPress Menu, 2, 5, 1.

Remote Fax Opt

1.Fwd/Page/Store

bPress a or b to choose Off.

Press OK.

Note

The LCD will give you options if there are

received faxes still in your machine’s

memory. (See Changing Remote Fax

Options on page 75.)

cPress Stop/Exit.

Chapter 9

Remote retrieval 9

The remote retrieval feature lets you retrieve

your stored fax messages when you are not

at the machine. You can call your machine

from any touch tone telephone or fax

machine, then use the Remote Access Code

to retrieve your messages.

Setting a Remote Access

Code 9

The Remote Access Code feature lets you

access the remote retrieval features when

you are away from your machine. Before you

use the remote access and retrieval features,

you have to set up your own code. The

default code is an inactive code: – – –l.

aPress Menu, 2, 5, 2.

Remote Fax Opt

2.Remote Access

bEnter a three-digit code using the

numbers 0 – 9, l or #.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Note

Do not use the same code used for your

Fax Receive Code (l51) or Telephone

Answer Code (#51). (See Changing the

Remote Codes on page 62.)

You can change your code at any time. If you

want to make your code inactive, press

Clear/Back and then OK in b to restore the

inactive setting – – –l.

Using your Remote Access

Code 9

aDial your fax number from a telephone

or another fax machine using touch

tone.

bWhen your machine answers,

immediately enter your Remote Access

Code (3 digits followed by l).

cThe machine signals if it has received

messages:

No beeps

No messages received.

1 long beep

Fax message received.

dThe machine gives two short beeps to

tell you to enter a command (See

Remote fax commands on page 78).

The machine will hang up if you wait

longer than 30 seconds before entering

a command. If you enter an invalid

command the machine will beep three

times.

ePress 9 0 to reset the machine when you

have finished.

fHang up.

Note

If your machine is set to Manual mode,

you can still access the remote retrieval

features. Dial the fax number as normal

and let the machine ring. After

100 seconds you will hear a long beep to

tell you to enter the remote access code.

You will then have 30 seconds to enter the

code.

Remote Fax Options (black & white only)

Retrieving fax messages 9

aDial your fax number from a telephone

or another fax machine using touch

tone.

bWhen your machine answers,

immediately enter your Remote Access

Code (3 digits followed by l). If you hear

one long beep, you have messages.

cWhen you hear two short beeps, use the

dial pad to press 9 6 2.

dWait for a long beep, and then use the

dial pad to enter the number of the

remote fax machine where you want

your fax messages sent, followed by ##

(up to 20 digits).

eHang up after you hear your machine

beep. Your machine will call the other

machine, which will then print your fax

messages.

Note

You can insert a pause in a fax number by

using the # key.

Changing the Fax Forwarding

number 9

You can change the default setting of your fax

forwarding number from another telephone or

fax machine using touch tone.

aDial your fax number from a telephone

or another fax machine using touch

tone.

bWhen your machine answers, enter

your Remote Access Code (3 digits

followed by l). If you hear one long

beep, you have messages.

cWhen you hear two short beeps, use the

dial pad to press 9 5 4.

dWait for a long beep, and then use the

dial pad to enter the new number of the

remote fax machine where you want

your fax messages forwarded followed

by ## (up to 20 digits).

ePress 9 0 to reset the machine when you

have finished.

fHang up after you hear your machine

beep.

Note

You can insert a pause in a fax number by

using the # key.

Chapter 9

Remote fax commands 9

Follow the commands below to access features when you are away from the machine. When you

call the machine and enter your Remote Access Code (3 digits followed by l), the system will give

two short beeps and you must enter a remote command.

Remote commands Operation details

95 Change the fax forwarding,

paging or fax storage settings

1 OFF You can choose Off after you have retrieved or erased all your

messages.

2 Fax Forwarding One long beep means the change is accepted. If you hear three

short beeps, you cannot make the change because something

has not been set up (for example, a fax forwarding or paging

number has not been registered). You can register your fax

forwarding number by entering 4. (See Changing the Fax

Forwarding number on page 77.) Once you have registered the

number, fax forwarding will work.

3 Paging

4 Fax Forwarding number

6 Fax Storage

96 Retrieve a fax

2 Retrieve all faxes Enter the number of a remote fax machine to receive stored fax

messages. (See Retrieving fax messages on page 77.)

3 Erase faxes from the memory If you hear one long beep, fax messages have been erased

from the memory.

97 Check the receiving status

1 Fax You can check whether your machine has received any faxes.

If yes, you will hear one long beep. If no, you will hear three

short beeps.

98 Change the Receive Mode

1 External TAD If you hear one long beep, your change has been accepted.

2 Fax/Tel

3 Fax Only

90 Exit Press 90 to exit remote retrieval. Wait for the long beep, then

replace the handset.

Polling lets you set up your machine so other

people can receive faxes from you, but they

pay for the call. It also lets you call somebody

else’s fax machine and receive a fax from it,

so you pay for the call. The polling feature

needs to be set up on both machines for this

to work. Not all fax machines support polling.

Polling receive 10

Polling receive lets you call another fax

machine to receive a fax.

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bPress Menu, 2, 1, 7.

Setup Receive

7.Polling RX

cEnter the fax number you are polling.

Press Start.

The LCD will show Dialing.

Sequential polling 10

Sequential polling lets you request

documents from several fax machines in one

operation. Afterwards, a Sequential Polling

Report will be printed.

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bPress Menu, 2, 1, 7.

Setup Receive

7.Polling RX

cSpecify the fax machines you want to

poll by using One Touch, Speed Dial,

Search, a Group or the dial pad. You

must press OK between each location.

Press OK.

dPress Start.

The machine polls each number or

Group number in turn for a document.

Press Stop/Exit while the machine is dialing

to cancel the polling process.

To cancel all sequential polling receive jobs,

press Menu, 2, 7. (See Checking and

canceling waiting jobs on page 45.)

Polling 10

Chapter 10

Polled transmit

(black & white only) 10

Polled transmit lets you set up your machine

to wait with a document so another fax

machine can call and retrieve it.

Setup for polled transmit 10

aMake sure you are in Fax mode .

bLoad your document.

cPress Menu, 2, 2, 6.

Setup Send

6.Polled TX

dPress a or b to choose On (or Off).

Press OK.

ePress 2 to choose 2.No if you do not

want to enter more settings when the

LCD asks you the following message:

Other Settings

1.Yes 2.No

fPress Start.

gIf you are using the scanner glass, the

LCD will prompt you to choose one of

the options below:

Next Page?

1.Yes 2.No(Send)

Press 1 to send another page.

Go to step h.

Press 2 or Start to send the

document.

hPlace the next page on the scanner

glass, press OK. Repeat steps g and

h for each additional page.

The document will be stored in memory

and wait to be polled.

Note

The document will be stored and can be

retrieved from any other fax machine until

you delete the fax from memory.

To delete the fax from memory, press

Menu, 2, 7. (See Checking and canceling

waiting jobs on page 45.)

Fax reports 11

You need to set up the Transmission

Verification Report and Journal Period using

the Menu keys.

Transmission verification

report 11

You can use the Transmission Verification

Report as proof that you sent a fax. This

report lists the receiving party’s name or fax

number, the time and date of transmission,

duration of transmission, number of pages

sent, and whether or not the transmission

was successful.

There are several settings available for the

Transmission Verification Report:

On: Prints a report after every fax you

send.

On+Image: Prints a report after every fax

you send. A portion of the fax’s first page

appears on the report.

Off: Prints a report if your fax is

unsuccessful due to a transmission error.

The report will also print if you send a color

fax that the receiving machine prints in

black and white. Off is the default setting.

Off+Image: Prints a report if your fax is

unsuccessful due to a transmission error.

The report will also print if you send a color

fax that the receiving machine prints in

black and white. A portion of the fax’s first

page appears on the report.

aPress Menu, 2, 4, 1.

Report Setting

1.Transmission

bPress a or b to choose On, On+Image,

Off or Off+Image.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Note

• If you choose On+Image or Off+Image,

the image will only appear on the

Transmission Verification Report if Real

Time Transmission is set to Off. (See

Real Time Transmission on page 43.)

• If your transmission is successful, OK will

appear next to RESULT on the

Transmission Verification Report. If

transmission is not successful, NG will

appear next to RESULT.

Printing reports 11

Chapter 11

Fax Journal 11

You can set the machine to print a fax journal

(activity report) at specific intervals (every

50 faxes, 6, 12 or 24 hours, 2 or 7 days). The

default setting is Every 50 Faxes, this

means that your machine will print the journal

when the machine has stored 50 jobs.

If you set the interval to Off, you can still print

the report by following the steps on the next

page.

aPress Menu, 2, 4, 2.

Report Setting

2.Journal Period

bPress a or b to choose an interval.

Press OK.

If you choose 7 days, you will be asked

to choose a day when you want the

7 day countdown to begin.

If you choose Every 50 Faxes, the

LCD shows Accepted. Then go to

step d.

cEnter the time to begin printing, in

24 hour format.

For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.

Press OK.

dPress Stop/Exit.

If you choose 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days, the

machine will print the report at the selected

time and then erase all jobs from its memory.

If the machine’s memory becomes full with

200 jobs before the time you chose has

passed, the machine will print the journal

early and then erase all jobs from memory.

If you want an extra report before it is due to

print, you can print it manually without erasing

the jobs from memory.

Reports 11

The following reports are available:

1Transmission

Displays the Transmission Verification

Report for your last outgoing 200 faxes

and prints the last report.

2Help List

Prints a list of commonly used functions to

help you program your machine.

3Tel Index List

Prints a list of names and numbers stored

in the One Touch and Speed Dial memory

in numerical or alphabetical order.

4Fax Journal

Prints a list of information about your last

200 incoming and outgoing faxes.

(TX: transmit.) (RX: receive.)

5User Settings

Print a list of your current settings.

6Network Config

Lists your network settings.

Printing reports

How to print a report 11

MFC-9325CW:

aPress Menu, 6.

Select ab or OK

6.Print Reports

bDo one of the following:

Press a or b to choose the report you

want.

Press OK.

Enter the number of the report you

want to print. For example, press 2 to

print the Help List.

cPress Black Start or Color Start.

dPress Stop/Exit.

MFC-9125CN:

aPress Reports.

bDo one of the following:

Press a or b to choose the report you

want.

Press OK.

Enter the number of the report you

want to print. For example, press 2 to

print the Help List.

If you choose 1.Transmission,

press a or b to choose

1.View on LCD or

2.Print Reports.

Then press OK.

If you choose 3.Tel Index List,

press a or b to choose 1.Numeric

or 2.Alphabetic.

Then press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Chapter 11

Section III

Copy III

Making copies 86

How to copy 12

Entering copy mode 12

Press (COPY) to enter Copy mode.

1 Stack/Sort

2 Copy ratio and Copy layout

3 Contrast

4Quality

5 Number of copies

Making a single copy 12

aMake sure you are in Copy mode .

bLoad your document in the ADF or on

the scanner glass.

cPress Black Start or Color Start.

Making multiple copies 12

aMake sure you are in Copy mode .

bLoad your document in the ADF.

cUse the dial pad to enter the number of

copies (up to 99).

dPress Black Start or Color Start.

Note

• To sort your copies, see Sorting copies

using the ADF on page 89.

• If the LCD shows "Please Wait" and the

machine stops copying while you are

making multiple copies, please wait for 30

to 40 seconds until the machine finishes

the color registrations and cleaning

process of the belt unit.

Stop copying 12

To stop copying, press Stop/Exit.

Making copies 12

Making copies

Copy options

(temporary settings) 12

When you want to quickly change the copy

settings temporarily for the next copy, use the

temporary Copy keys. You can use different

combinations.

The machine returns to its default settings

one minute after copying, unless you have

set the Mode Timer to 30 seconds or less.

(See Mode Timer on page 25.)

Enlarging or reducing the

image copied 12

You can choose the following enlargement or

reduction ratios:

* The factory setting is shown in Bold with an

asterisk.

Custom(25-400%) allows you to enter a

ratio from 25% to 400%.

To enlarge or reduce the next copy follow the

instructions below:

aMake sure you are in Copy mode .

bLoad your document.

cUse the dial pad to enter the number of

copies (up to 99).

dPress Enlarge/Reduce.

eDo one of the following:

Press a or b to choose the

enlargement or reduction ratio you

want.

Press OK.

Press a or b to choose

Custom(25-400%).

Press OK.

Use the dial pad to enter an

enlargement or reduction ratio from

25% to 400%. (For example, press

53 to enter 53%.)

Press OK.

fPress Black Start or Color Start.

Note

Page Layout Options 2 in 1(P), 2 in 1(L),

4 in 1(P) or 4 in 1(L) are not available with

Enlarge/Reduce.

Press

100%*

97% LTRiA4

94% A4iLTR

91% Full Page

85% LTRiEXE

83% LGLiA4

78% LGLiLTR

70% A4iA5

50%

Custom(25-400%)

200%

141% A5iA4

104% EXEiLTR

Chapter 12

Using the Options key 12

Use the Options key to quickly set the following copy settings temporarily for the next copy.

Press

Menu selections Options Page

Press a or b, then press OK

Stack/Sort

(appears when the document

is in the ADF)

Stack*

Sort

Brightness b-onnnn+a

b-nonnn+a

b-nnonn+a*

b-nnnon+a

b-nnnno+a

Contrast b-onnnn+a

b-nonnn+a

b-nnonn+a*

b-nnnon+a

b-nnnno+a

Page Layout Off(1 in 1)*

2in1(P)

2in1(L)

4in1(P)

4in1(L)

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Making copies

Improving copy quality 12

You can choose from a range of quality

settings. The default setting is Auto.

Auto

Auto is the recommended mode for

ordinary printouts. Suitable for documents

that contain both text and photographs.

Photo

Suitable for copying photographs.

Text

Suitable for documents containing only

text.

To temporarily change the quality setting,

follow the steps below:

aMake sure you are in Copy mode .

bLoad your document.

cUse the dial pad to enter the number of

copies (up to 99).

dPress Quality.

ePress a or b to choose Auto, Photo or

Text.

Press OK.

fPress Black Start or Color Start.

To change the default setting, follow the

steps below:

aPress Menu, 3, 1.

Copy

1.Quality

bPress a or b to choose the copy quality.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Sorting copies using the ADF12

You can sort multiple copies. Pages will be

stacked in the order 1 2 3, 1 2 3, 1 2 3, and so

on.

aMake sure you are in Copy mode .

bLoad your document in the ADF.

cUse the dial pad to enter the number of

copies (up to 99).

dPress Options. Press a or b to choose

Stack/Sort.

Press OK.

ePress a or b to choose Stack or Sort.

Press OK.

fPress Black Start or Color Start.

Adjusting Contrast, Color and

Brightness 12

Contrast 12

Adjust the contrast to help an image look

sharper and more vivid.

To temporarily change the contrast setting,

follow the steps below:

aMake sure you are in Copy mode .

bLoad your document.

cUse the dial pad to enter the number of

copies (up to 99).

dPress Options.

Press a or b to choose Contrast.

Press OK.

ePress a or b to increase or decrease the

contrast.

Press OK.

fPress Black Start or Color Start.

Chapter 12

To change the default setting follow the steps

below:

aPress Menu, 3, 3.

Copy

3.Contrast

bPress a or b to increase or decrease the

contrast.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Brightness 12

Adjust the copy brightness to make copies

darker or lighter.

To temporarily change the copy brightness

setting, follow the steps below:

aMake sure you are in Copy mode .

bLoad your document.

cUse the dial pad to enter the number of

copies (up to 99).

dPress Options.

Press a or b to choose Brightness.

Press OK.

ePress a to make a lighter copy or press

b to make a darker copy.

Press OK.

fPress Black Start or Color Start.

To change the default setting follow the steps

below:

aPress Menu, 3, 2.

Copy

2.Brightness

bPress a to make a lighter copy or press

b to make a darker copy.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Color saturation 12

You can change the default setting for color

saturation.

To change the default setting follow the steps

below:

aPress Menu, 3, 4.

Copy

4.Color Adjust

bPress a or b to choose 1.Red,

2.Green, or 3.Blue.

Press OK.

cPress a or b to increase or decrease the

color saturation.

Press OK.

dReturn to step b to choose the next

color. Or press Stop/Exit.

Making copies

Making N in 1 copies

(page layout) 12

You can reduce the amount of paper used

when copying by using the N in 1 copy

feature. This allows you to copy two or four

pages onto one page, which lets you save

paper.

IMPORTANT

• Please make sure the paper size is set to

Letter, A4, Legal or Folio.

•(P) means Portrait and (L) means

Landscape.

• You cannot use the Enlarge/Reduce

setting with the N in 1 feature.

aMake sure you are in Copy mode .

bLoad your document.

cUse the dial pad to enter the number of

copies (up to 99).

dPress Options. Press a or b to choose

Page Layout. Press OK.

ePress a or b to choose 2in1(P),

2in1(L), 4in1(P),

4in1(L) or Off(1 in 1).

Press OK.

fPress Black Start or Color Start to

scan the page.

If you placed the document in the ADF,

the machine scans the pages and starts

printing.

If you are using the scanner glass, go

to step g.

gAfter the machine scans the page, press

1 to scan the next page.

Next Page?

1.Yes 2.No

hPlace the next page on the scanner

glass.

Press OK.

Repeat steps g and h for each page of

the layout.

iAfter all the pages have been scanned,

press 2 in step g to finish.

If you are copying from the ADF: 12

Insert your document face up in the direction

shown below:

2 in 1 (P)

2 in 1 (L)

4 in 1 (P)

4 in 1 (L)

Chapter 12

If you are copying from the scanner

glass: 12

Insert your document face down in the

direction shown below:

2 in 1 (P)

2 in 1 (L)

4 in 1 (P)

4 in 1 (L)

Out of memory

message 12

If the memory becomes full while you are

making copies, the LCD message will guide

you through the next step.

If you get an Out of Memory message

while scanning a subsequent page, you will

have the option to press Black Start or

Color Start to copy the pages scanned so

far, or to press Stop/Exit to cancel the

operation.

To gain extra memory, you can do the

following:

Print the faxes that are in the memory.

(See Printing a fax from the memory

on page 52.)

You can turn off Fax Storage. (See

Turning off Remote Fax Options

on page 75.)

Add optional memory. (See Memory

board on page 126.)

Note

When you get an Out of Memory

message, you may be able to make

copies if you first print the incoming faxes

in the memory to restore the memory to

100%.

Section IV

Direct printing IV

Printing photos from a digital camera

(MFC-9325CW only) 94

Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive

(MFC-9325CW only) 99

Your Brother machine supports the

PictBridge standard, allowing you to connect

to and print photos directly from any

PictBridge compatible digital camera.

Even if your camera is not in PictBridge mode

or does not support PictBridge, you can

connect your camera as a normal storage

device. This enables you to print photos from

your camera. Follow the steps for “Printing

data from a USB Flash memory drive

(MFC-9325CW only) on page 99”.

Before using

PictBridge 13

PictBridge requirements 13

To avoid errors, remember the following

points:

The machine and the digital camera must

be connected using a suitable USB cable.

The image file must be taken with the

digital camera you want to connect to the

machine.

Using PictBridge 13

Setting your digital camera 13

Make sure your camera is in PictBridge

mode. The following PictBridge settings may

be available from the LCD of your PictBridge

compatible camera. Depending on your

camera some of these settings may not be

available.

Copies

Qualities

Paper size

Date print

File name print

Layout (1 in 1 printing/Index printing only)

Note

The names and availability of each setting

depends on the specification of your

camera.

You can also set the following PictBridge

settings by using the control panel.

1If you choose the paper size Letter, A4 or B5, Portrait

will be chosen. If you choose A5, B6 or A6,

Landscape will be chosen.

Printing photos from a digital

camera (MFC-9325CW only) 13

Menu selections Options

Paper Size Letter, A4, B5, A5, B6, A6

Orientation Portrait, Landscape 1

Date & Time Off, On

File Name Off, On

Print Quality Normal, Fine

Printing photos from a digital camera (MFC-9325CW only)

aPress Menu, 5, 3.

USB Direct I/F

3.PictBridge

bTo set the PictBridge settings, press a or

b to choose 1.Paper Size,

2.Orientation, 3.Date & Time,

4.File Name, or 5.Print Quality.

Press OK.

cPress a or b to choose an option for

each menu setting.

Press OK.

Repeat b to c for each PictBridge

setting.

dPress Stop/Exit.

Note

• Camera settings are prioritized as long as

your camera is not set to use your

machine’s settings (default settings). If

your camera is set to use your machine’s

settings, the machine will print your photo

using the settings below.

• Please refer to the documentation

supplied with your camera for more

detailed information on changing

PictBridge settings.

Printing images 13

aMake sure that your camera is turned

off. Connect your camera to the USB

direct interface (1) on the front of the

machine using a suitable USB cable.

bTurn on the camera. Make sure your

camera is in PictBridge mode.

When the machine has recognized the

camera, the LCD shows the following

messages, depending on which mode

the machine is in:

04/20 15:30 Fax

Camera Connected

Scan:Select ab

Camera Connected

Stack Copies:02

Camera Connected

cSet your camera to print an image. Set

the number of copies if you are asked.

When the machine starts printing an

image, the LCD will show the following

message:

PictBridge

Printing. Kee...

Note

Please refer to the documentation

supplied with your camera for detailed

operations how to print using PictBridge.

Machine settings Default settings

Paper Size Letter

Orientation Portrait

Date & Time Off

File Name Off

Print Quality Normal

Chapter 13

IMPORTANT

• To prevent damage to your machine, do

not connect any device other than a digital

camera or USB flash memory drive to the

USB direct interface.

• DO NOT remove the digital camera from

the USB direct interface until the machine

has finished printing.

DPOF printing 13

DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format.

Major digital camera manufacturers (Canon

Inc., Eastman Kodak Company, FUJIFILM

Corporation, Panasonic Corporation and

Sony Corporation) created this standard to

make it easier to print images from a digital

camera.

If your digital camera supports DPOF

printing, you will be able to choose on the

digital camera display the images and

number of copies you want to print.

The following DPOF settings are available.

1 in 1 printing

Copies

Printing images with

Secure Function

Lock 2.0 enabled

(MFC-9325CW only) 13

For more information about Secure Function

Lock 2.0, see Chapter 11 of the Network

User’s Guide on the CD-ROM we have

supplied.

aMake sure that your camera is turned

off. Connect your camera to the USB

direct interface (1) on the front of the

printer using a suitable USB cable.

bTurn on the camera. Make sure your

camera is in PictBridge mode.

When the machine has recognized the

camera, the LCD shows the following

message.

Access Denied

cPress a or b to choose ID. Press OK.

dEnter the password. Press OK.

Change ID

PIN:XXXX

Printing photos from a digital camera (MFC-9325CW only)

Note

If your ID has restricted options, the

following messages appear on the LCD.

eThe LCD shows one of the following

messages, depending on which mode

the machine is in:

04/20 15:30 Fax

Camera Connected

Scan:Select ab

Camera Connected

Stack Copies:02

Camera Connected

fSet your camera to print an image. Set

the number of copies if you are asked.

When the machine starts printing an

image, the LCD will show the following

message:

PictBridge

Printing. Kee...

Note

Please refer to the documentation

supplied with your camera for detailed

operations how to print using PictBridge.

IMPORTANT

DO NOT remove the digital camera from

the USB direct interface until the printer

has finished printing.

Message Meaning

Access Denied Printing documents

directly from a camera to

the Brother machine is

restricted.

Limit Exceeded The number of pages you

are allowed to print is

exceeded. The print job

will be canceled.

Mono Print Only Printing color documents

is restricted.

Not Available Printing pictures directly

from a camera to the

Brother machine is

restricted.

Chapter 13

Connecting a camera

as a storage device 13

Even if your camera is not in PictBridge

mode, or does not support PictBridge, you

can connect your camera as a normal

storage device. This enables you to print

photos from your camera.

Follow the steps in Printing data directly from

the USB Flash memory drive (MFC-9325CW

only) on page 100.

(If you would like to print photos in PictBridge

mode, see Setting your digital camera

on page 94.)

Note

The name of the storage mode and

operation differs among digital cameras.

Please refer to the documentation

supplied with your camera for detailed

information, such as how to switch from

PictBridge mode to mass storage mode.

Understanding the

error messages 13

Once you are familiar with the types of errors

that can occur while you are using the

PictBridge, you can easily identify and

troubleshoot any problems.

Out of Memory

This message will appear if you are

working with images that are too large for

the machine's memory.

Unusable Device

This message will appear if you connect

an incompatible or broken device to the

USB direct interface. To clear the error,

unplug the device from the USB direct

interface.

(For more detailed solutions, see Error and

maintenance messages on page 144.)

With the Direct Print feature, you do not need

a computer to print data. You can print by just

plugging your USB Flash memory drive into

the machine’s USB direct interface.

Note

Some USB Flash memory drives may not

work with the machine.

Supported file formats 14

Direct Print supports the following file

formats:

PDF version 1.7 1

JPEG

Exif + JPEG

PRN (created by Brother driver)

TIFF (scanned by all MFC or DCP Brother

models)

PostScript® 3™ (created by the Brother

BRScript3 printer driver)

XPS version 1.0

1PDF data that includes a JBIG2 image file, a

JPEG2000 image file or a transparency file is not

supported.

Creating a PRN or

PostScript® 3™ file for

direct printing 14

Note

The screens in this section may vary

depending on your application and

operating system.

aFrom the menu bar of an application,

click File, then Print.

bChoose Brother MFC-XXXX Printer (1)

and check the Print to file box (2).

Click Print.

cChoose the folder you want to save the

file to and enter the file name if you are

prompted to.

If you are prompted for a file name only,

you can also specify the folder you want

to save the file in by entering the

directory name. For example:

C:\Temp\FileName.prn

If you have a USB Flash memory drive

or digital camera connected to your

computer, you can save the file directly

to the USB Flash memory drive.

Printing data from a USB Flash

memory drive

(MFC-9325CW only) 14

Chapter 14

100

Printing data directly

from the USB Flash

memory drive

(MFC-9325CW only) 14

aConnect your USB Flash memory drive

to the USB direct interface (1) on the

front of the machine.

The Direct key will light up. Press

Direct. Your machine will enter Direct

Print Mode.

bPress a or b to choose the folder name

or file name you want to print.

Press OK.

If you have chosen the folder name,

press a or b to choose the file name you

want to print.

Press OK.

Direct Print

1.FILE_1.PDF

Note

• If you want to print an index of the files,

choose Index Print, and then press

OK. Press Black Start or Color Start to

print the data.

• File names that are stored in your USB

Flash memory drive can be displayed the

following characters on the LCD: A B C D

E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X

Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 $ % ’ ` - @ { } ~ ! #

( ) & _ ^

cDo one of the following:

Press a or b to choose a setting you

need to change and press OK, and

then press a or b to choose an option

for the setting and press OK.

If you do not need to change the

current default settings, go to

step d.

Print File Set

Paper Size e

Note

• You can choose the following settings:

Paper Size

Media Type

Multiple Page

Orientation

Collate

Print Quality

PDF Option

• Depending on the file type, some of

these settings may not appear.

dPress Black Start or Color Start if you

have finished.

ePress the dial pad key to enter the

number of copies you want.

Press OK.

Copies

Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive (MFC-9325CW only)

101

fPress Black Start or Color Start to

print the data.

IMPORTANT

• To prevent damage to your machine, DO

NOT connect any device other than a

digital camera or USB Flash memory drive

to the USB direct interface.

• DO NOT remove the USB Flash memory

drive or digital camera from the USB direct

interface until the machine has finished

printing.

Note

You can change the default settings for

Direct Print by using the control panel

when the machine is not in the Direct Print

mode. Press Menu, 5 to enter the

USB Direct I/F menu. (See Entering

text on page 219.)

Printing data directly

from the USB flash

memory drive with

Secure Function

Lock 2.0 enabled

(MFC-9325CW only) 14

For more information about Secure Function

Lock 2.0, see Chapter 11 of the Network

User’s Guide on the CD-ROM we have

supplied.

aConnect your USB Flash memory drive

to the USB direct interface (1) on the

front of the machine.

The Direct key will light up. Press

Direct. Your machine will enter Direct

Print Mode.

bThe following message appears if

Secure Function Lock is on.

Access Denied

cPress a or b to choose ID. Press OK.

dEnter the password. Press OK.

Change ID

PIN:XXXX

Chapter 14

102

Note

If your ID has the restricted options, the

following messages appear on the LCD.

eThe file names appear if the password is

correct.

fPress a or b to choose the folder name

or file name you want to print.

Press OK.

If you have chosen the folder name,

press a or b to choose the file name you

want to print.

Press OK.

Direct Print

1.FILE_1.PDF

Note

• If you want to print an index of the files,

choose Index Print, and then press

OK. Press Black Start or Color Start to

print the data.

• File names containing more than

8 characters will appear on the LCD as the

first 6 characters of the file name followed

by a tilde mark (~) and a number.

For example, “HOLIDAY2007.JPG” would

appear as “HOLIDA~1.JPG”.

Only the following characters can be

displayed on the LCD:

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T

U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 $ % ’ ` - @

{ } ~ ! # ( ) & _ ^

gDo one of the following:

Press a or b to choose a setting you

need to change and press OK, and

then press a or b to choose an option

for the setting and press OK.

If you do not need to change the

current default settings, go to

step h.

Print File Set

Paper Size e

Note

• You can choose the following settings:

Paper Size

Media Type

Multiple Page

Orientation

Collate

Print Quality

PDF Option

• Depending on the file type, some of

these settings may not appear.

hPress Black Start or Color Start if you

have finished.

Message Meaning

Access Denied Printing documents

directly from the USB

flash memory drive to the

Brother machine is

restricted.

Limit Exceeded The number of pages you

are allowed to print is

exceeded. The print job

will be canceled.

No Permission Printing color documents

is restricted. The print job

will be canceled.

Mono Print Only Printing color documents

is restricted.

Not Available Printing pictures directly

from the USB Flash

memory drive to the

Brother machine is

restricted.

Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive (MFC-9325CW only)

103

iPress the dial pad key to enter the

number of copies you want.

Press OK.

Copies

jPress Black Start or Color Start to

print the data.

IMPORTANT

DO NOT remove the USB flash memory

from the USB direct interface until the

printer has finished printing.

Understanding the

error messages 14

Once you are familiar with the types of errors

that can occur while you print data from the

USB Flash memory drive with Direct Print,

you can easily identify and troubleshoot any

problems.

Out of Memory

This message will appear if you are

working with images that are too large for

the machine’s memory.

Unusable Device

This message will appear if you connect

an incompatible or broken device to the

USB direct interface. To clear the error,

unplug the device from the USB direct

interface.

(See Error and maintenance messages

on page 144 for the detailed solution.)

Chapter 14

104

Section V

Software V

Software and Network features 106

106

The User’s Guide on the CD-ROM includes

the Software User’s Guide and Network

User’s Guide for features available when

connected to a computer (for example,

printing and scanning). These guides have

easy to use links that, when clicked, will take

you directly to a particular section.

You can find information on these features:

Printing

Scanning

ControlCenter3 (Windows®)

ControlCenter2 (Macintosh)

Remote Setup

Faxing from your computer

Network Faxing

Network Printing

Network Scanning

Wireless Network Users

(MFC-9325CW only)

Note

See Accessing the Software User’s Guide

and Network User’s Guide on page 3.

Software and Network features 15

Section VI

Appendixes VI

Safety and legal 108

Options 125

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance 128

Menu and features 197

Specifications 221

Glossary 240

108

Compilation and Publication A

Under the supervision of Brother Industries, Ltd., this manual has been compiled and published,

covering the latest product descriptions and specifications.

The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are subject to change without

notice.

Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications and materials

contained herein and shall not be responsible for any damages (including consequential) caused

by reliance on the materials presented, including but not limited to typographical and other errors

relating to the publication.

Choosing a location A

Put your product on a flat, level, stable surface that is free of vibration and shocks, such as a desk.

Put the product near a telephone wall jack and a standard grounded AC power outlet. Choose a

location where the temperature remains between 50F and 90.5F (10C and 32.5C) and the

humidity is between 20% to 80% (without condensation).

WARNING

DO NOT expose the product to direct sunlight, excessive heat, open flames, corrosive gasses,

moisture or dust. Doing so may create a risk of an electrical short or fire. It may also damage

the product and/or render it inoperable.

DO NOT place the product near heaters, air conditioners, electrical fans, refrigerators, or water.

Doing so may create the risk of a short circuit or fire, should water come into contact with the

product (including condensation caused by heating, air conditioning, or ventilation equipment).

DO NOT place the product near chemicals. Should the chemicals come into contact with the

product, there may be a risk of fire. The chemicals may also cause the product to malfunction

or become discolored.

Safety and legal A

Safety and legal

109

DO NOT put the product in a location where any slot or opening in the product is obstructed or

blocked. These slots and openings are provided for ventilation. Blocking the product’s

ventilation could create a risk of overheating and/or fire.

Instead:

• Keep a gap of roughly 4 inches (100 mm) between the ventilation hole and the wall.

• Place the product on a solid surface.

• DO NOT place this product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar soft surface.

• DO NOT place this product near or over a radiator or heater.

• DO NOT place this product in a “built-in” installation unless adequate ventilation is provided.

DO NOT put objects on top of the product. Doing so could increase the risk of overheating

and/or fire should the product malfunction.

DO install your product near an AC power outlet that is easily accessible. In the event of an

emergency, easy access to the plug and outlet will allow you to shut off power to the product

quickly and completely.

Plastic bags are used in the packing of your product and drum unit. Plastic bags are not toys.

To avoid the danger of suffocation, keep these bags away from babies and children and dispose

of them properly.

To reduce the risk of shock or fire, use only a No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.

Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Never touch telephone wires or

terminals that are not insulated unless the telephone line has been unplugged at the wall jack.

Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install a telephone wall jack in a

wet location.

CAUTION

Avoid placing your product in a high-traffic area. If you must place it in a high-traffic area, ensure

that the product is in a safe location where it cannot be accidentally knocked-over, which could

cause injury to you and serious damage to the product. Also ensure that cords are secured so

as not to pose a tripping hazard. DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table.

The product is heavy and may fall, causing injury to you, and serious damage to the product.

110

IMPORTANT

• DO NOT place your product next to devices that contain magnets or generate magnetic fields.

Doing so may interfere with the operation of the product, causing print quality problems.

• DO NOT place your product next to sources of interference, such as speakers or the base units

of non Brother cordless telephones. Doing so may interfere with the operation of the product’s

electronic components.

• DO NOT connect your product to an AC power outlet controlled by wall switches or automatic

timers. Disruption of power can delete information from the product’s memory.

• DO NOT connect your product to an AC power outlet on the same circuit as large appliances

or other equipment that requires a significant amount of electricity to operate. Operating this

product in conjunction with the other product(s) could create an overvoltage, tripping your

circuit breaker or blowing your fuse.

Safety and legal

111

To use the product safely A

Please keep these instructions for later reference and read them before attempting any

maintenance. If you do not follow these safety instructions, there is a possibility of a fire, electrical

shock, burn or suffocation.

WARNING

ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

Failure to follow the warnings in this section may create the risk of an electrical shock. In

addition, you could create an electrical short, which may create the risk of a fire.

There are high voltage electrodes inside the product. Before you access the inside of the

product, including for routine maintenance such as cleaning, make sure you have unplugged the

telephone line cord first and then the power cord from the AC power outlet, as well as any

telephone (RJ-11) or Ethernet (RJ-45) cables from the product. Never push objects of any kind

into this product through cabinet slots, since they may touch dangerous voltage points or short

out parts.

DO NOT handle the plug with wet hands.

Always make sure the plug is fully inserted. DO NOT use the product or handle the cord if the

cord has become worn or frayed.

DO NOT touch this product during an electrical storm.

DO NOT allow this product to come into contact with water. This product should not be used

around standing water including a bathtub, sink, or swimming pool, around appliances

containing water including a refrigerator, or in a wet basement.

112

This product should be connected to an AC power source within the range indicated on the

rating label. DO NOT connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure what kind

of power source you have, contact a qualified electrician.

Always disconnect all cables from the wall outlet before servicing, modifying or installing the

equipment.

Power Cord Safety:

• This product is equipped with a 3-wire grounded plug. This plug will only fit into a grounded

power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, call

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. DO NOT defeat the purpose of the grounded

plug.

• Use only the power cord supplied with this product.

• DO NOT allow anything to rest on the power cord. DO NOT place this product where people

can walk on the cord. DO NOT place this product in a position where the cord is stretched or

strain is otherwise put on the cord. Doing so may cause the cord to become worn or frayed.

• If an extension cord is used with this product, make sure that the total ampere ratings on the

products plugged into the extension cord do not exceed the extension cord ampere rating.

Also, make sure that the total of all products plugged into the AC power outlet does not

exceed 15 amperes.

• The power cord, including extensions, should be no longer than 16.5 feet (5 meters).

• We DO NOT advise using an extension cord.

Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Never touch telephone wires or

terminals that are not insulated unless the telephone line has been unplugged at the wall jack.

Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install a telephone wall jack in a

wet location.

Safety and legal

113

FIRE HAZARDS

DO NOT use flammable substances, any type of spray, or an organic solvent/liquid that

containing alcohol or ammonia to clean the inside or outside of the product. Doing so could

cause a fire. Instead, use only a dry, lint-free cloth. See Routine maintenance on page 157 for

more information on how to clean the product.

DO NOT attempt to operate this product with a paper jam or with stray pieces of paper inside

the product. Prolonged contact of the paper with the drum unit could cause a fire.

DO NOT use a vacuum cleaner to clean up scattered toner. Doing this might cause the toner

dust to ignite inside the vacuum cleaner, potentially starting a fire. Please carefully clean the

toner dust with a dry, lint-free soft cloth and dispose of it according to local regulations.

DO NOT use this product in the vicinity of a gas leak or combustible dust.

DO NOT inhale the toner powder. If toner powder is inhaled, please follow these steps

immediately:

• Move to an area with plenty of fresh air.

• Gargle and rinse your mouth out with plenty of water.

• If you develop a cough or any other symptoms soon after inhaling the toner, consult your

doctor immediately.

If toner powder is swallowed, rinse your mouth immediately and drink plenty of fresh water to

dilute the toner. Then consult your doctor immediately thereafter. For more safety information

regarding the toners used in your product, please visit the following web address to read the

Safety Data Sheets http://sds.brother.co.jp/sdsapp/index.html, which include important

information about the chemical composition of the toners and the precautions to take in case of

overexposure to toner.

114

HOT SURFACE

After you have just used the product, some internal parts will be extremely hot. To prevent injury,

DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration, when you open the top or back cover

(back output tray) of the machine.

DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration. These rollers may be rotating at high

speed and can pinch or entrap your hand.

This product is heavy and weighs approximately 50.5 lb (22.9 kg). To prevent injuries when

moving or lifting this machine, make sure to use at least two people. Be careful not to pinch your

fingers when you set the machine back down.

Safety and legal

115

CAUTION

DO NOT put your hands on the edge of the product under the document cover, the scanner, or

the top cover as shown in the illustrations. Doing this may cause injury to your fingers by

pinching them.

DO NOT put your fingers in the areas shown in the illustrations. Doing this may cause injury to

your fingers by pinching them.

116

IMPORTANT

DO NOT remove or damage the caution labels located on or in the product.

Note

Lightning and power surges can damage this product. We recommend that you use a quality

surge protection device on the AC power line and any telephone (RJ-11) or Ethernet (RJ-45)

cable plugged into the product, or that you unplug the cords during a lightning storm.

Safety and legal

117

Important safety instructions A

1 Read all of these instructions.

2 Save these instructions for later reference.

3 Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.

4 Be careful not to inhale toner.

5 DO NOT place anything in front of the product that will block printed pages or received faxes.

DO NOT place anything in the path of printed pages or received faxes.

6 Wait until pages have exited the product before picking them up.

7 DO NOT attempt to service this product yourself because opening or removing covers may

expose you to dangerous voltage points and other risks and may void your warranty. Refer all

servicing to a Brother Authorized Service Center. For the location of your nearest Brother

Authorized Service Center, please call:

In USA: 1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437)

In Canada: 1-877-BROTHER

8 Unplug this product from the AC power outlet and refer all servicing to Brother Authorized

Service Personnel under the following conditions:

When the power cord is damaged or frayed. (DO NOT touch the damaged/frayed part while

unplugging your product.)

If liquid has been spilled into the product.

If the product has been exposed to rain or water.

If the product does not operate normally when the operating instructions are followed.

Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions. Improper

adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by

a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.

If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.

If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.

118

Regulation A

Standard telephone and FCC notices A

These notices are in effect on models sold and used in the United States only.

When programming emergency numbers or making test calls to emergency numbers:

Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging

up.

Perform these activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the

ACTA. On the backside of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a

product identifier in the format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided

to the telephone company.

You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone line by means of a standard modular jack,

USOC RJ11C.

A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network

must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A

compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be

connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. (See installation instructions for

details.)

The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.

Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an

incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be

certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs,

contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this

product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.The digits

represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 06 is a REN of 0.6). For earlier

products, the REN is separately shown on the label.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in

advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not

practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be

advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures

that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will

provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted

service.

If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please contact

Brother Customer Service. (See Brother numbers on page i) If the equipment is causing harm to

the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment

until the problem is resolved.

Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility

commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.

Safety and legal

119

If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the

installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about

what will disable alarm equipment, call your telephone company or a qualified installer.

If you are not able to solve a problem with your product, call Brother Customer Service. (See

Brother numbers on page i)

WARNING

For protection against the risk of electrical shock, always disconnect all cables from the wall

outlet before servicing, modifying or installing the equipment.

IMPORTANT

• This equipment may not be used on coin service lines provided by the telephone company or

connected to party lines.

• Brother cannot accept any financial or other responsibilities that may be the result of your use

of this information, including direct, special or consequential damages. There are no

warranties extended or granted by this document.

• This product has been certified to comply with FCC standards, which are applied to the USA

only. A grounded plug should be plugged into a grounded AC power outlet after checking the

rating of the local power supply for the product to operate properly and safely.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of

Conformity (USA only) A

declares, that the products

Product Name: MFC-9125CN / MFC-9325CW

comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Responsible Party: Brother International Corporation

100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard

Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA

TEL: (908) 704-1700

120

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,

pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection

against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can

radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may

cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference

will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or

television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is

encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is

connected.

Call the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

(Wireless network models only)

This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or

transmitter.

IMPORTANT

• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Brother Industries, Ltd. could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

• A shielded interface cable should be used to ensure compliance with the limits for a Class B

digital device.

Industry Canada Compliance Statement (Canada only) A

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES–003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB–003 du Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,

and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired

operation of this device.

L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux conditions suivantes:

(1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout

brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le

fonctionnement du dispositif.

Safety and legal

121

EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT LIMITATIONS (Canada only) A

NOTICE

This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.

Ce produit est conforme aux caractéristiques techniques appropriées d’Industrie Canada.

NOTICE

The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to

be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any

combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices

does not exceed five.

L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie est une indication du nombre maximal d’appareils qu'il est

permis de brancher sur une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister

en n’importe quelle combinaison d’appareils à la condition que la somme des indices

d'équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les appareils ne dépasse pas cinq.

For use in the USA or Canada only A

These machines are made for use in the USA and Canada only. We cannot recommend using

them overseas because it may violate the Telecommunications Regulations of that country and

the power requirements of your machine may not be compatible with the power available in foreign

countries. Using USA or Canada models overseas is at your own risk and may void your warranty.

Disconnect device A

This product must be installed near an AC power outlet that is easily accessible. In case of

emergencies, you must disconnect the power cord from the AC power outlet to shut off power

completely.

LAN connection A

CAUTION

DO NOT connect this product to a LAN connection that is subject to over-voltages.

122

International ENERGY STAR® Qualification Statement A

The purpose of the International ENERGY STAR® Program is to promote the development and

popularization of energy-efficient office equipment.

As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Brother Industries, Ltd. has determined that this product meets

the ENERGY STAR® specifications for energy efficiency.

Safety and legal

123

Trademarks A

The Brother logo is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.

Brother is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Outlook and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and other countries.

Apple, Macintosh, Safari and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United

States and other countries.

Intel, Intel Core and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.

PowerPC is a registered trademark of IBM in the United States and/or other countries.

Adobe, Flash, Illustrator, Photoshop, PostScript and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks

or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Alliance are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

AOSS is a trademark of Buffalo Inc.

Nuance, the Nuance logo, PaperPort and ScanSoft are trademarks or registered trademarks of

Nuance Communications, Inc. or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.

Any trade names and product names of companies appearing on Brother products, related

documents and any other materials are all trademarks or registered trademarks of those

respective companies.

Open Source Licensing Remarks A

This product includes open-source software.

Please see Open Source Licensing Remarks and Copyright information on the supplied CD-ROM.

(For Windows®) “X:\License.txt” (where X is your drive letter).

(For Macintosh) Double-click the CD-ROM icon on your desktop. Then double-click the Utilities

icon. License.rtf will appear.

124

Legal limitations for copying A

Color reproductions of certain documents are illegal and may result in either criminal or civil

liability. The listing below is intended to be a guide rather than a complete listing of every possible

prohibition. In case of doubt, we suggest that you consult with the appropriate authority or advisor

with regard to the specific document.

The following documents issued by the United States/ Canadian Government or any of its

Agencies, States, Territories or Provineces may not be copied:

Money

Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness

Certificates of Deposit

Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)

Selective Service or draft papers

Passports

United States/Canadian Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)

Food Stamps

Immigration Papers

Checks or drafts drawn by Governmental agencies

Identifying badges or insignias

Licenses and Certificates of Title to motor vehicles, under certain State/Provincial law

Copying copyrighted works may be regulated by Federal, State or local laws. For more

information,consult an appropriate authority or advisor.

125

Options B

This machine has the following optional accessory. You can increase the capabilities of the

machine with this item.

Options B

SO-DIMM memory

126

Memory board B

MFC-9325CW and MFC-9125CN have

64 MB of standard memory. They also have

one slot for optional memory expansion. You

can increase the memory up to a maximum of

576 MB by installing one SO-DIMM (Small

Outline Dual In-line Memory Module). When

you add the optional memory, it increases the

performance for both copier and printer

operations.

In general, the machine uses

industry-standard SO-DIMM with the

following specifications:

Type: 144 pin and 64 bit output

CAS latency: 2

Clock frequency: 100 MHz or more

Capacity: 64, 128, 256 or 512 MB

Height: 1.25 in. (31.75 mm)

Dram Type: SDRAM 2 Bank

For information regarding memory for your

Brother machine please visit us at:

www.brother-usa.com/support/memory.

Note

• There might be some SO-DIMMs that will

not work with the machine.

• For more information, call Brother

Customer Service.

Installing extra memory B

aTurn off the machine’s power switch.

Unplug the telephone line cord.

bDisconnect the interface cable from the

machine, and then unplug the power

cord from the AC power outlet.

Note

Be sure to turn off the machine’s power

switch before you install or remove the

SO-DIMM.

cRemove the plastic (1) and then

metal (2) SO-DIMM covers.

dUnpack the SO-DIMM and hold it by its

edges.

IMPORTANT

To prevent damage to the machine from

static electricity, DO NOT touch the

memory chips or the board surface.

Options

127

eHold the SO-DIMM by the edges and

align the notches in the SO-DIMM with

the protrusions in the slot. Insert the

SO-DIMM diagonally (1), then tilt it

toward the interface board until it clicks

into place (2).

fPut the metal (2) and then the plastic (1)

SO-DIMM covers back on.

gPlug the machine’s power cord back into

the AC power outlet first, and then

connect the interface cable.

hPlug in the telephone line cord. Turn on

the machine’s power switch.

Note

To make sure that you have installed the

SO-DIMM properly, you can print the user

settings page that shows the current

memory size. (See How to print a report

on page 83.)

128

Troubleshooting C

IMPORTANT

For technical help, you must call the country where you bought the machine. Calls must be

made from within that country.

If you are having difficulty with your machine C

If you think there is a problem, check the chart below and follow the troubleshooting tips. You can

solve most problems by yourself.

If you need additional help, the Brother Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and

troubleshooting tips.

Visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.

Troubleshooting and routine

maintenance C

Printing or printing received faxes

Difficulties Suggestions

Condensed print

Horizontal streaks

Top and bottom sentences are

cut off

Missing lines

Usually this is caused by a poor telephone connection. If your copy looks good,

you probably had a bad connection, with static or interference on the telephone

line. Ask the other party to send the fax again.

Poor print quality See Improving the print quality on page 136.

Vertical black lines when receiving The corona wires for printing may be dirty. Clean the corona wires on the four

drum units. (See Cleaning the corona wires on page 160.)

The sender’s scanner may be dirty. Ask the sender to make a copy to see if the

problem is with the sending machine. Try receiving from another fax machine.

If the problem continues, call Brother Customer Service at 1-877-BROTHER

(1-877-276-8437) (in USA) or 1-877-BROTHER (in Canada).

Received faxes appear as split or

blank pages.

If the received faxes are divided and printed on two pages or if you get an extra

blank page, your paper size setting may not be correct for the paper you are using.

(See Paper Size on page 25.)

Turn on Auto Reduction. (See Printing a reduced incoming fax on page 51.)

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

129

Telephone line or connections

Difficulties Suggestions

Dialing does not work. Check for a dial tone.

Change Tone/Pulse setting. (See the Quick Setup Guide.) (Canada only)

Check all line cord connections.

Check that the machine is plugged in and switched on.

Send a manual fax by pressing Hook or by lifting the handset of an external

telephone and dialing the number. Wait to hear fax receiving tones before

pressing Black Start or Color Start.

The machine does not answer

when called.

Make sure the machine is in the correct receive mode for your setup. (See

Receive Mode settings on page 49.) Check for a dial tone. If possible, call your

machine to hear it answer. If there is still no answer, check the telephone line cord

connection. If you do not hear ringing when you call your machine, ask your

telephone company to check the line.

Receiving Faxes

Difficulties Suggestions

Cannot receive a fax. Make sure your machine has a dial tone by pressing the Hook key. If you hear

static or interference on your fax line, please contact your local telephone

company.

Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into

the telephone wall jack and the LINE jack of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL

or VoIP services, please contact your service provider for connection instructions.

Make sure the machine is in the correct Receive Mode. This is determined by the

external devices and telephone subscriber services you have on the same line as

the Brother machine. (See Receive Mode settings on page 49.)

If you have a dedicated fax line and want your Brother machine to automatically

answer all incoming faxes, you should select Fax Only mode.

If your Brother machine shares a line with an external answering machine, you

should select the External TAD mode. In External TAD mode, your Brother

machine will automatically receive incoming faxes and voice callers will be able to

leave a message on your answering machine.

If your Brother machine shares the line with a Voice Mail subscriber service,

please see Voice Mail on page 53.

If your Brother machine is on a line with the Distinctive Ring subscriber service,

please see Distinctive Ring on page 54.

If your Brother machine shares a line with other telephones and you want it to

automatically answer all incoming faxes, you should select the Fax/Tel mode. In

Fax/Tel mode, your Brother machine will automatically receive faxes and

produce a pseudo/double-ring to alert you to answer voice calls.

If you do not want your Brother machine to automatically answer any incoming

faxes, you should select the Manual mode. In Manual mode, you must answer

every incoming call and activate the machine to receive faxes.

130

Cannot receive a fax.

(continued)

Another device or service at your location may be answering the call before your

Brother machine answers. To test this, lower the ring delay setting:

If the answer mode is set to Fax Only or Fax/Tel, reduce the ring delay to

1 ring. (See Ring Delay on page 49.)

If the answer mode is set to External TAD, reduce the number of rings

programmed on your answering machine to 2.

If the answer mode is set to Manual, DO NOT adjust the ring delay setting.

Have someone send you a test fax:

If you received the test fax successfully, your machine is operating properly.

Remember to reset your ring delay or answering machine setting back to your

original setting. If receiving problems recur after resetting the ring delay, then

a person, device, or subscriber service is answering the fax call before the

machine has a chance to answer.

If you were not able to receive the fax, then another device or subscriber

service may be interfering with your fax reception or there may be a problem

with your fax line.

If you are using a telephone answering machine (External TAD mode) on the

same line as the Brother machine, make sure your answering machine is set up

correctly. (See Connecting an external TAD (telephone answering device)

on page 57.)

1 Plug the telephone line cord directly from the wall telephone jack to your

Brother machine’s LINE jack.

2 Remove the protective cap from your Brother machine’s EXT jack, and then

plug the telephone line cord from your answering machine into the EXT jack.

3 Set your answering machine to answer within 4 rings.

If you are having problems receiving faxes or voice messages, set your

answering machine to answer within 2 or 3 rings.

4 Record the outgoing message on your answering machine.

Record five seconds of silence at the beginning of your outgoing

message.

Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.

End your outgoing message with your Fax Receive Code for people

sending manual faxes. For example: “After the beep, leave a message or

press l51 and Start to send a fax.”

5 Set your answering machine to answer calls.

6 Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to External TAD. (See Receive

Mode settings on page 49.)

Make sure your Brother machine's Easy Receive feature is turned On. Easy

Receive is a feature that allows you to receive a fax even if you have answered

the call on an external or extension telephone. (See Easy Receive on page 50.)

If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone

line, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for VoIP). (See

Telephone line interference/ VoIP on page 143.)

(For MFC-9325CW only) Contact your administrator to check your Secure

Function Lock Settings.

Receiving Faxes (continued)

Difficulties Suggestions

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

131

Sending faxes

Difficulties Suggestions

Poor sending quality. Try changing your resolution to Fine or S.Fine. Make a copy to check your

machine’s scanner operation. If the copy quality is not good, clean the scanner.

(See Cleaning the scanner on page 158.)

Transmission Verification Report

says RESULT:NG.

There is probably temporary noise or static on the line. Try sending the fax again.

If you are sending a PC Fax message and get RESULT:NG on the Transmission

Verification Report, your machine may be out of memory. To free up extra

memory, you can turn off fax storage (see Turning off Remote Fax Options

on page 75), print fax messages in memory (see Printing a fax from the memory

on page 52) or cancel a delayed fax or polling job (see Checking and canceling

waiting jobs on page 45). If the problem continues, ask the telephone company to

check your telephone line.

If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone

line, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for VoIP). (See

Telephone line interference/ VoIP on page 143.)

Sent faxes are blank. Make sure you are loading the document properly. (See Loading documents

on page 23.)

Vertical black lines when sending. Black vertical lines on faxes you send are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid

on the glass strip. (See Cleaning the scanner on page 158.)

Cannot send a fax. (For MFC-9325CW only) Contact your administrator to check your Secure

Function Lock Settings.

Handling incoming calls

Difficulties Suggestions

The machine ‘Hears’ a voice as a

CNG Tone.

If Easy Receive is set to On, your machine is more sensitive to sounds. It may

mistakenly interpret certain voices or music on the line as a fax machine calling

and respond with fax receiving tones. Deactivate the machine by pressing

Stop/Exit. Try avoiding this problem by turning Easy Receive to Off. (See Easy

Receive on page 50.)

Sending a Fax Call to the machine. If you answered on an external or extension telephone, press your Fax Receive

Code (default setting is l51). When your machine answers, hang up.

Custom features on a single line. If you have Call Waiting, Call Waiting/Caller ID, Caller ID, RingMaster, Voice Mail,

an answering machine, an alarm system or other custom feature on a single

telephone line with your machine, it may create a problem sending or receiving

faxes.

For Example: If you subscribe to Call Waiting or some other custom service and

its signal comes through the line while your machine is sending or receiving a fax,

the signal can temporarily interrupt or disrupt the faxes. Brother’s ECM feature

should help overcome this problem. This condition is related to the telephone

system industry and is common to all devices that send and receive information

on a single, shared line with custom features. If avoiding a slight interruption is

crucial to your business, a separate line with no custom features is recommended.

Menu access difficulties

Difficulties Suggestions

The machine beeps when you try to

access the Setup Receive and

Setup Send menus.

If FAX is not illuminated, press it to turn on Fax mode. The Setup Receive

setting (Menu, 2, 1) and Setup Send setting (Menu, 2, 2) are available only when

the machine is in Fax mode.

132

Copy difficulties

Difficulties Suggestions

Cannot make a copy. Make sure that COPY is illuminated. (See Entering copy mode

on page 86.)

(For MFC-9325CW only) Contact your administrator to check your Secure

Function Lock Settings.

Vertical black line appears in

copies.

Black vertical lines on copies are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid on the

glass strip, or the corona wire is dirty. (See Cleaning the scanner on page 158 and

Cleaning the corona wires on page 160.)

Copies are blank. Make sure you are loading the document properly. (See Using the automatic

document feeder (ADF) on page 23 or Using the scanner glass on page 24.)

Printing difficulties

Difficulties Suggestions

No printout. Check that the machine is plugged in and the power switch is turned on.

Check that the toner cartridge and drum unit are installed properly. (See

Replacing the drum units on page 177.)

Check the interface cable connection on both the machine and your computer.

(See the Quick Setup Guide.)

Check that the correct printer driver has been installed and chosen.

Check to see if the LCD is showing an error message. (See Error and

maintenance messages on page 144.)

Check that the machine is online:

(Windows® 7 and Windows Server® 2008 R2) Click the Start button and

Devices and Printers. Right-click Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make sure

that Use Printer Offline is unchecked.

(Windows Vista®) Click the Start button, Control Panel, Hardware and

Sound, and then Printers. Right-click Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make

sure that Use Printer Offline is unchecked.

(Windows® XP and Windows Server® 2003/2008) Click the Start button and

choose Printers and Faxes. Right-click Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make

sure that Use Printer Offline is unchecked.

(For MFC-9325CW only) Contact your administrator to check your Secure

Function Lock settings.

The machine prints unexpectedly

or it prints garbage.

Pull out the paper tray and wait until the machine stops printing. Then turn off

the machine’s power switch and disconnect from the power for several

minutes. (The machine can be turned off for approximately 60 hours without

losing faxes stored in the memory.)

Check the settings in your application to make sure it is set up to work with

your machine.

The machine prints the first couple

of pages correctly, then some

pages have text missing.

Check the settings in your application to make sure that it is set up to work with

your machine.

Your computer is not recognizing the machine’s input buffer’s full signal. Make

sure that you connected the interface cable correctly. (See the Quick Setup

Guide.)

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

133

The headers or footers appear

when the document displays on the

screen but they do not show up

when it is printed.

There is an unprintable area on the top and bottom of the page. Adjust the top and

bottom margins in your document to allow for this. (See Unprintable area

on page 17.)

The machine is not printing or has

stopped printing.

Press Job Cancel.

As the machine cancels the job and clears it from the memory it may produce an

incomplete printout.

Scanning difficulties

Difficulties Suggestions

TWAIN errors appear while

scanning.

Make sure that the Brother TWAIN driver is chosen as the primary source. In

PaperPort™ 11SE, click File, Scan or Get Photo and choose the Brother TWAIN

driver.

OCR does not work. Try increasing the scanning resolution.

Network scanning does not work. See Network difficulties on page 134.

Cannot scan. (For MFC-9325CW only) Contact your administrator to check your Secure

Function Lock Settings.

Software difficulties

Difficulties Suggestions

Cannot install software or print. Run the Repair MFL-Pro Suite program on the CD-ROM. This program will repair

and reinstall the software.

Cannot perform ‘2 in 1’ or ‘4 in 1’

printing.

Check that the paper size setting in the application and in the printer driver are the

same.

The machine does not print from

Adobe® Illustrator®.

Try to reduce the print resolution. (See Advanced tab in the Software User’s Guide

on the CD-ROM.)

Paper handling difficulties

Difficulties Suggestions

The machine does not load paper.

The LCD shows No Paper or a

Paper Jam message.

If there is no paper, load a new stack of paper into the paper tray.

If there is paper in the paper tray, make sure it is straight. If the paper is curled,

you should straighten it. Sometimes it is helpful to remove the paper, turn the

stack over and put it back into the paper tray.

Reduce the amount of paper in the paper tray, and then try again.

Make sure that manual feed mode is not chosen in the printer driver.

Clean the paper pick-up roller. See Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers

on page 166.

If the LCD shows the Paper Jam message and you still have a problem, see

Paper jams on page 152.

The machine does not feed paper

from the manual feed slot.

Make sure that Manual is chosen in the printer driver.

Make sure the paper or print media is loaded properly in the manual feed slot.

See Loading paper in the manual feed slot on page 13.

Printing difficulties (continued)

Difficulties Suggestions

134

How do I print on envelopes? You can load envelopes from the manual feed slot. Your application must be set

up to print the envelope size you are using. This is usually done in the Page Setup

or Document Setup menu of your application. (See your application’s manual for

more information.)

What paper can I use? You can use thin paper, plain paper, thick paper, bond paper, recycled paper,

envelopes and labels that are made for laser machines. (For details, see

Acceptable paper and other print media on page 18.)

There is a paper jam. Clear the jammed paper. (See Paper jams on page 152.)

Print quality difficulties

Difficulties Suggestions

Printed pages are curled. Low quality thin or thick paper or not printing on the recommended side of the

paper could cause this problem. Try turning over the stack of paper in the

paper tray.

Make sure that you choose the Paper Type that suits the print media type you

are using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 18.)

Printed pages are smeared. The Paper Type setting may be incorrect for the type of print media you are using,

or the print media may be too thick or have a rough surface. (See Acceptable

paper and other print media on page 18 and Basic tab in the Software User’s

Guide on the CD-ROM.)

Printouts are too light. If this problem occurs when making copies or printing received faxes, turn

Toner Save mode to Off in the machine menu settings. (See Toner Save

on page 27.)

Set Toner Save mode to Off in the Advanced tab in the printer driver. (See

Advanced tab in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

In the Basic tab of the printer driver, click the Settings button and check the

Enhance Black Printing check box.

Network difficulties

Difficulties Suggestions

Cannot print over a wired Network. If you are having Network problems see the Network User’s Guide on the

CD-ROM for more information.

Make sure your machine is powered on and is on-line and in the Ready mode.

Print the Network Configuration list to see your current Network settings. (See

How to print a report on page 83.) Reconnect the LAN cable to the hub to verify

that the cable and network connections are good. If possible, try connecting the

machine to a different port on your hub using a different cable. If the connections

are good, the lower LED of the back panel of the machine will be green.

Paper handling difficulties (continued)

Difficulties Suggestions

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

135

The network scanning feature

does not work. (Windows®)

If you are using personal firewall software, it may be necessary to set your third-

party Security/Firewall Software to allow Network scanning. To add port 54925

for Network scanning, enter the information below:

In Name: Enter any description, for example Brother NetScan.

In Port number: Enter 54925.

In Protocol: UDP is selected.

Please refer to the instruction manual that came with your third-party

Security/Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.

For more details, you can read FAQs and troubleshooting suggestions at

http://solutions.brother.com/.

(Macintosh)

The network scanning feature may not work due to the firewall settings.

Change or disable the firewall settings. If you are using a third-party personal

Firewall software, see the User's Guide for your software or contact the

software manufacturer.

Re-select your machine in the Device Selector application located in

Macintosh HD/Library/Printers/Brother/Utilities/Device Selector or from

the model list in ControlCenter2.

The network PC-Fax Receive

feature does not work. (Windows® only)

If you are using personal firewall software, it may be necessary to set your third-

party Security/Firewall Software to allow PC-FAX Rx. To add port 54926 for

Network PC-FAX Rx, enter the information below:

In Name: Enter any description, for example Brother PC-FAX Rx.

In Port number: Enter 54926.

In Protocol: UDP is selected.

Please refer to the instruction manual that came with your third-party

Security/Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.

For more details, you can read FAQs and troubleshooting suggestions at

http://solutions.brother.com/.

Your computer cannot find your

machine. (Windows®) The firewall setting on your PC may be rejecting the necessary

network connection. (For details, see the instructions above.)

(Macintosh) Re-select your machine in the Device Selector application located

in Macintosh HD/Library/Printers/Brother/Utilities/DeviceSelector or from

the Model pop-up menu of ControlCenter2.

Other

Difficulties Suggestions

The machine will not turn on. Adverse conditions on the power connection (such as lightning or a power surge)

may have triggered the machine’s internal safety mechanisms. Turn the machine

off and unplug the power cord. Wait for ten minutes, then plug in the power cord

and turn the machine on.

If the problem is not solved, turn off the machine. Plug the power cord into a

different known working outlet and turn on the machine.

Network difficulties (continued)

Difficulties Suggestions

136

Improving the print quality C

If you have a print quality problem, print a test page first (Menu, 4, 2, 3). If the printout looks good,

the problem is probably not the machine. Check the interface cable connections or try printing a

different document. If the printout or test page printed from the machine has a quality problem,

check the following steps first. And then, if you still have a print quality problem, check the chart

below and follow the recommendation.

aCheck that you use the paper that meets our specifications. (See Acceptable paper and other

print media on page 18.)

Note

To get the best print quality, we suggest using the recommended paper. (See Recommended

paper and print media on page 18.)

bCheck that the drum units and toner cartridges are installed properly.

Examples of poor print

quality

Recommendation

White lines, bands or ribbing

across the page

Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum units on page 177.)

To identify the color of the drum unit, visit us at

http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting

tips.

Colors are light or unclear on

the whole page

Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the control panel of the machine

or the printer driver.

Make sure that you choose the proper media type in the printer driver

or in the machine's Paper Type menu setting. (See Acceptable paper

and other print media on page 18 and Basic tab in the Software

User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)

Shake all four toner cartridges gently.

Wipe the windows of all four LED heads with a dry lint free soft cloth.

(See Cleaning the LED heads on page 159.)

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

137

White streaks or bands down

the page

Wipe the windows of all four LED heads with a dry lint free soft cloth.

(See Cleaning the LED heads on page 159.)

Make sure that foreign material such as a torn piece of paper, sticky

note or dust is not inside the machine and around the drum unit and

toner cartridge.

Clean all four drum units. (See Cleaning the drum unit on page 162.)

Identify the missing color and put in a new toner cartridge. (See

Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 171.)

To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at

http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting

tips.

Colored streaks or bands down

the page

Clean all four corona wires (one for each color) inside the drum unit

by sliding the green tab. (See Cleaning the corona wires

on page 160.)

Make sure the corona wire cleaners are at their home positions (a).

Clean the scanner glass and scanner glass strip. (See Cleaning the

scanner on page 158.)

Replace the toner cartridge that matches the color of the streak or

band. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 171.)

To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at

http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting

tips.

Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum units on page 177.)

To identify the color of the drum unit, visit us at

http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting

tips.

Vertical streaks in a light

background

Wipe the windows of all four LED heads with a dry lint free soft cloth.

(See Cleaning the LED heads on page 159.)

Examples of poor print

quality

Recommendation

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

138

Colored lines across the page

If colored lines appear at 1.2 in. (30 mm) intervals, replace the toner

cartridge that matches the color of the line. (See Replacing a Toner

cartridge on page 171.)

If colored lines appear at 3.7 in. (94 mm) intervals, put in a new drum

unit that matches the color of the line. (See Replacing the drum units

on page 177.)

White spots or hollow print

If the problem is not solved after printing a few pages, the drum unit

may be stained. Clean all four drum units. (See Small spots on the

printed pages in Cleaning the drum unit on page 162.)

Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the

machine's Paper Type menu matches the type of paper you are

using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 18 and

Basic tab in the Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)

Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as high humidity

can cause white spots or hollow print. (See Choosing a location

on page 108.)

Completely blank or some

colors are missing

Put in a new toner cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge

on page 171.)

To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at

http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting

tips.

Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum units on page 177.)

To identify the color of the drum unit, visit us at

http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting

tips.

Colored spots at 94 mm

If the problem is not solved after printing a few pages, the drum unit

may have glue from a label stuck on the drum surface. Clean the

drum unit. (See Large spots on the printed pages on page 163.)

Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum units on page 177.)

To identify the color of the drum unit, visit us at

http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting

tips.

Colored spots at 30 mm

Identify the color causing the problem and put in a new toner

cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 171.)

To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at

http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting

tips.

Examples of poor print

quality

Recommendation

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

94 mm

(3.7 in.)

94 mm

(3.7 in.)

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

30 mm (1.2 in.)

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

139

Toner scatter or toner stain

Check the machine's environment. Conditions such as high humidity

and high temperatures may cause this print quality problem. (See To

use the product safely on page 111.)

Identify the color causing the problem and put in a new toner

cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 171.)

To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at

http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting

tips.

If the problem continues, put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the

drum units on page 177.)

To identify the color of the drum unit, visit us at

http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting

tips.

The color of your printouts is

not what you expected

Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the control panel of the machine

or the printer driver.

Perform the calibration. (See Calibration on page 167.)

Adjust the color by using the custom setting in the driver and by using

the control panel of the machine. Colors the machine can print and

colors you see on a monitor are different. The machine may not be

able to reproduce the colors on your monitor.

If colors appear in the printed gray areas, make sure there is a check

in the Improve Gray Color check box of the printer driver. (See Basic

tab for Windows® printer driver, Advanced tab for Macintosh printer

driver or Printer Features for Macintosh BR-Script printer driver in the

Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

If shaded areas look dull, remove the check from the Improve Gray

Color check box.

If a printed black graphic is too light, choose Enhance Black Printing

mode in the printer driver. (See Settings Dialog for Windows® printer

driver, Advanced options for Windows® BR-Script printer driver, Print

Settings for Macintosh printer driver or Printer Features for Macintosh

BR-Script printer driver in the Software User's Guide on the

CD-ROM.)

Identify the color causing the problem and put in a new toner

cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 171.)

To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at

http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting

tips.

Identify the color causing the problem and put in a new drum unit.

(See Replacing the drum units on page 177.)

To identify the color of the drum unit, visit us at

http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting

tips.

Examples of poor print

quality

Recommendation

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

140

All one color

Identify the color causing the problem and put in a new drum unit.

(See Replacing the drum units on page 177.)

To identify the color of the drum unit, visit us at

http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting

tips.

Color misregistration

Make sure that the machine is on a solid level surface.

Perform the auto color registration using the control panel (see Auto

Registration on page 168) or perform the manual color registration

using the control panel (see Manual Registration on page 168).

Identify the color causing the problem and put in a new drum unit.

(See Replacing the drum units on page 177.)

To identify the color of the drum unit, visit us at

http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting

tips.

Put in a new belt unit. (See Replacing the belt unit on page 181.)

Uneven density appears

periodically across the page

Perform the calibration. (See Calibration on page 167.)

Adjust the contrast or brightness when you are in copy mode. (See

Adjusting Contrast, Color and Brightness on page 89.)

Identify the color that is uneven and put in a new toner cartridge for

that color. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 171.)

To identify the color of the toner cartridge, visit us at

http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting

tips.

Identify the color that is uneven and put in a new drum unit. (See

Replacing the drum units on page 177.)

To identify the color of the drum unit, visit us at

http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting

tips.

Thin lines do not print Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the control panel of the machine

or the printer driver.

Change the print resolution.

If you use Windows® printer driver, choose Improve Pattern

Printing or Improve Thin Line in Settings of Basic tab. (See

Settings Dialog in the Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)

Examples of poor print

quality

Recommendation

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghij klmnop qrstuv wxyz.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

141

Wrinkle

Change to the recommended type of paper.

Make sure that the back cover is closed properly.

Make sure that two gray levers inside the back cover are in the up

position.

Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the

machine’s Paper Type menu matches the type of paper you are

using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 18 and

Basic tab in the Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)

Offset image

Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the

machine's Paper Type menu matches the type of paper you are

using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 18 and

Basic tab in the Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)

Make sure that two gray levers inside the back cover are in the up

position.

Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as dry and low

temperatures may cause this print quality problem. (See Choosing a

location on page 108.)

Identify the color causing the problem and put in a new drum unit.

(See Replacing the drum units on page 177.)

To identify the color of the drum unit, visit us at

http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting

tips.

Poor fixing

Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the

machine's Paper Type menu matches the type of paper you are

using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 18 and

Basic tab in the Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)

Make sure that two gray levers inside the back cover are in the up

position.

Choose Improve Toner Fixing mode in the printer driver. (See Other

Print Options (For Windows® printer driver), Advanced options (For

Windows® BR-Script printer driver), Print Settings (For Macintosh

printer driver) or Printer Features (For Macintosh BR-Script printer

driver) in the Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)

If this selection does not provide enough improvement, select

Thicker paper in Media Type settings.

Examples of poor print

quality

Recommendation

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

142

Curled or wavy

Choose Reduce Paper Curl mode in the printer driver when you do

not use our recommended paper. (See Other Print Options (For

Windows® printer driver), Advanced options (For Windows®

BR-Script printer driver), Print Settings (For Macintosh printer driver)

or Printer Features (For Macintosh BR-Script printer driver) in the

Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)

If you do not use the machine often, the paper may have been in the

paper tray too long. Turn over the stack of paper in the paper tray.

Also, fan the paper stack and then rotate the paper 180 in the paper

tray.

Store the paper where it will not be exposed to avoid high

temperatures and high humidity.

Uneven density or faded

Fully open the top cover and then close it again.

Envelope creases

Make sure that the envelope lever is pulled down when you are printing

envelopes.

Examples of poor print

quality

Recommendation

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.

ABCDEFG

EFGHIJKLMN

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

143

Setting Dial Tone detection C

Setting the Dial Tone to Detection will

shorten the Dial Tone detect pause.

a(USA) Press Menu, 0, 4.

(Canada) Press Menu, 0, 5.

Initial Setup

4.Dial Tone

bPress a or b to choose Detection or

No Detection.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Telephone line interference/

VoIP C

If you are having difficulty sending or

receiving a fax due to possible interference

on the telephone line, we recommend that

you adjust the Equalization for compatibility

to reduce the modem speed for fax

operations.

aPress Menu, 2, 0, 1.

Miscellaneous

1.Compatibility

bPress a or b to choose

Basic(for VoIP), Normal or High.

Basic(for VoIP) cuts the

modem speed to 9600 bps and turns

the error correction mode (ECM) off.

For a standard telephone line: If you

regularly experience interference on

your standard telephone line try this

setting.

If you are using VoIP: VoIP service

providers offer fax support using

various standards. If you regularly

experience fax transmission errors

try this setting.

Normal sets the modem speed at

14400 bps.

High sets the modem speed at

33600 bps.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Note

When you change the Compatibility to

Basic(for VoIP), the ECM feature is

only available for color fax sending.

144

Error and maintenance messages C

As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur and consumable items may need to be

replaced. If this happens, your machine identifies the error or required routine maintenance and

shows the appropriate message. The most common error and maintenance messages are shown

below.

You can correct most errors and perform routine maintenance by yourself. If you need more help,

the Brother Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips:

Visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/

Error Message Cause Action

Access Error

(MFC-9325CW only)

The device is removed from the

USB direct interface while the

data is processing.

Press Stop/Exit. Reinsert the device and try

to print with Direct Print.

Belt End Soon The belt unit is near the end of its

life.

Buy a new belt unit before you get a

Replace Belt message.

Calibrate Calibration failed. Press Black Start or Color Start and try it

again.

Turn off the machine. Wait a few

seconds, then turn it on again.

Identify the color causing the problem

and put in a new drum unit. (See

Replacing the drum units on page 177.)

To identify the color of the drum unit, visit

us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view

our FAQs and troubleshooting tips.

Put in a new belt unit. (See Replacing the

belt unit on page 181.)

Put in a waste toner box. (See Replacing

the waste toner box on page 185.)

If the problem continues, call your dealer

or Brother Customer Service.

Cartridge Error

Put the Black (K)

Toner Cartridge

back in. 1

1The toner cartridge

color with the problem

is shown in the

message.

The toner cartridge is not installed

properly.

Take out the drum unit and toner cartridge

assembly for the toner color that is indicated

on the LCD. Remove the toner cartridge and

then re-install it in the drum. Put the drum

unit and toner cartridge assembly back into

the machine again.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

145

Cooling Down

Wait for a while

The temperature of the drum unit

or toner cartridge is too hot. The

machine will pause its current

print job and go into cooling down

mode. During the cooling down

mode, you will hear the cooling

fan running while the LCD shows

Cooling Down, and

Wait for a while.

Make sure that you can hear the fan in the

machine spinning and that the exhaust outlet

is not blocked by something.

If the fan is spinning, remove any obstacles

that surround the exhaust outlet, and then

leave the machine turned on but do not use

it for several minutes.

If the fan is not spinning do the following:

Disconnect the machine from the power for

several minutes, then reconnect it. (The

machine can be turned off for approximately

4 days without losing faxes stored in the

memory. See Transferring your faxes or Fax

Journal report on page 150.)

Comm.Error Poor telephone line quality

caused a communication error.

Send the fax again or connect the machine

to another telephone line. If the problem

continues, call the telephone company and

ask them to check your telephone line.

Connection Fail You tried to poll a fax machine

that is not in Polled Waiting mode.

Check the other fax machine’s polling setup.

Cover is Open The ADF cover is not closed

completely.

Close the ADF cover of the machine, then

press Stop/Exit.

The top cover is not closed

completely.

Close the top cover of the machine.

Cover is Open The fuser cover is not closed

completely or paper was jammed

in the back of the machine when

you turned on the power.

Close the fuser cover of the machine.

Make sure paper is not jammed inside

the back of the machine, and then close

the fuser cover and press Black Start or

Color Start.

DIMM Error The DIMM is not installed

correctly. Or the DIMM is broken.

Turn off the machine. Re-install the DIMM

correctly. Wait a few seconds, and then turn

it on again. If this error message appears

again, replace the DIMM with a new one.

(See Installing extra memory on page 126.)

Disconnected The other person or other

person’s fax machine stopped the

call.

Try to send or receive again.

Document Jam The document was not inserted

or fed properly, or the document

scanned from the ADF was too

long.

See Document jams on page 151 or Using

the automatic document feeder (ADF)

on page 23.

DR Mode in Use The machine is set to Distinctive

Ring mode. You cannot change

the Receive Mode from Manual to

another mode.

Set Distinctive Ring to Off. (See Turning off

distinctive ring on page 56.)

Error Message Cause Action

146

Drum Error The corona wire on the drum unit

needs to be cleaned.

Clean the corona wire on the drum unit. (See

Cleaning the corona wires on page 160.)

It is time to replace the drum

units.

Replace the drum unit with a new one for the

color that is indicated on the LCD. (See

Replacing the drum units on page 177.)

Drums End Soon The drum unit is near the end of

its life.

Buy new drum units before you get a

Replace Drums message.

Drum End Soon(X) 1The drum unit for the color

indicated on the LCD is near the

end of its life.

Buy new drum unit for the color indicated on

the LCD before you get a

Replace Drum(X) 1 message.

Fuser Error The temperature of fuser unit

does not rise at a specified

temperature within specified time.

Turn the power switch off, wait a few

seconds, and then turn it on again. Leave the

machine for 15 minutes with the power on.

The machine can be turned off for

approximately 60 hours without losing faxes

stored in the memory. (See Transferring your

faxes or Fax Journal report on page 150.)

The fuser unit is too hot.

Init Unable XX The machine has a mechanical

problem.

Disconnect the machine from the power

for several minutes, then reconnect it.

(The machine can be turned off for

approximately 60 hours without losing

faxes stored in the memory. See

Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal

report on page 150.)

If the problem continues, call Brother

Customer Service.

Jam Inside The paper is jammed inside the

machine.

(See Paper jams on page 152.)

Jam Rear The paper is jammed in the back

of the machine.

(See Paper jams on page 152.)

Jam Tray The paper is jammed in the paper

tray of the machine.

(See Paper jams on page 152.)

No Belt Unit The belt unit is not installed

properly.

Re-install the belt unit. (See Replacing the

belt unit on page 181.)

No Paper The machine is out of paper or

paper is not properly loaded in the

paper tray.

Do one of the following:

Refill the paper in the paper tray and

press Black Start or Color Start or put

the paper in the manual feed slot.

Remove the paper and load it again.

Then press Black Start or Color Start.

If the problem is not solved, the paper

pick-up roller may be stained. Clean the

paper pickup roller. (See Cleaning the

paper pick-up rollers on page 166.)

Error Message Cause Action

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

147

No Response/Busy The number you dialed does not

answer or is busy.

Verify the number and try again.

No Toner The toner cartridge or the drum

unit and toner cartridge assembly

is not installed properly.

Re-install the toner cartridge or the drum unit

that is indicated on the LCD.

No Waste Toner The waste toner box is not

installed properly.

Re-install the waste toner box. (See

Replacing the waste toner box on page 185.)

Out of Memory The machine’s memory is full. Fax sending or copy operation in

progress

Do one of the following:

Press Black Start or Color Start to send

or copy the scanned pages.

Press Stop/Exit and wait until the other

operations in progress finish, and then try

again.

Clear the data from the memory. (See

Out of memory message on page 45 or

page 92.)

Print operation in process

Do one of the following:

Reduce print resolution. (See Advanced

tab in the Software User’s Guide on the

CD-ROM.)

Clear the faxes from the memory. (See

Out of memory message on page 92.)

Print Unable XX The machine has a mechanical

problem.

Do one of the following:

Disconnect the machine from the power

for several minutes, then reconnect it.

(The machine can be turned off for

approximately 60 hours without losing

faxes stored in the memory. See

Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal

report on page 150.)

If the problem continues, call Brother

Customer Service.

Print Unable 1A One of the issues that can cause

this error is that condensation

may form inside the machine after

a room temperature change.

Turn the power switch off and fully open the

top cover. Leave the machine off and open

for 30 minutes to remove any condensation

from inside the machine, then close the top

cover and turn it on again. If this does not

clear the error, call Brother Customer

Service.

Protected Device

(MFC-9325CW only)

The protect switch of the USB

Flash memory drive is on.

Turn off the protect switch of the USB Flash

memory drive.

Error Message Cause Action

148

Registration Registration failed. Press Black Start or Color Start and try

again.

Do one of the following:

Turn off the machine’s power switch.

Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.

Try Manual Registration, Menu, 4, 7.

(See Manual Registration on page 168.)

Put in a new belt unit. (See Replacing the

belt unit on page 181.)

If the problem continues, call Brother

Customer Service.

Rename the File

(MFC-9325CW only)

There is already a file on the USB

Flash memory drive with the

same name as the file you are

trying to save.

Change the file name of the file on the USB

Flash memory drive or the file you are trying

to save.

Replace Belt It is time to replace the belt unit. Replace the belt unit. (See Replacing the

belt unit on page 181.)

Replace Drums It is time to replace the drum

units.

Replace the drum units.

(See Replacing the drum units on page 177.)

The drum unit counter was not

reset when a new drum was

installed.

Reset the drum unit counter.

(See Resetting the drum counter

on page 181.)

Replace Drum(X) 1It is time to replace the drum unit

for the indicated color.

Replace the drum unit for the color indicated

on the LCD.

(See Replacing the drum units on page 177.)

Replace Fuser It is time to replace the fuser unit. Call Brother Customer Service or a Brother

Authorized Service Center to replace the

fuser unit.

To replace Fuser Unit call Brother Customer

Service at:

1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in USA)

1-877-BROTHER (in Canada)

or to locate a Brother Authorized Service

Center, visit us at:

http://www.brother-usa.com/service/

Replace PF Kit It is time to replace the paper

feeding kit.

Call Brother Customer Service or a Brother

Authorized Service Center to replace the

PF Kit.

To replace PF Kit call Brother Customer

Service at:

1-877-BROTHER (1-877-276-8437) (in USA)

1-877-BROTHER (in Canada)

or to locate a Brother Authorized Service

Center, visit us at:

http://www.brother-usa.com/service/

Error Message Cause Action

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

149

1(X) shows the toner cartridge or drum unit color that is near the end of its life. (K)=Black, (Y)=Yellow, (M)=Magenta,

(C)=Cyan.

Replace Toner The toner cartridge is at the end

of its life.

Replace the toner cartridge for the color

indicated on the LCD. (See Replacing a

Toner cartridge on page 171.)

Replace WT Box It is time to replace the waste

toner box.

Replace the waste toner box. (See

Replacing the waste toner box on page 185.)

Scan Unable XX The machine has a mechanical

problem.

Disconnect the machine from the power

for several minutes, then reconnect it.

(The machine can be turned off for

approximately 60 hours without losing

faxes stored in the memory. See

Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal

report on page 150.)

If the problem continues, call Brother

Customer Service.

Short paper The paper size detected is

shorter than the paper size

defined in the print job and the

paper size being used requires

the back cover to be open.

Open the back cover (back output tray) and

remove any printed pages. Leave the back

cover open and press Black Start or

Color Start.

Size mismatch The paper in the tray is not the

correct size.

Load the correct size of paper in the tray and

set the “Paper Size” (Menu, 1, 2, 2 (See

Paper Size on page 25)).

Small paper The paper size defined in the

printer driver requires the back

cover to be open.

Open the back cover (back output tray) and

press Black Start or Color Start. (See

Printing on thick paper, labels, envelopes or

small paper on page 14.)

Toner Low The toner cartridge is near the

end of its life.

Buy a new toner cartridge for the color that is

indicated on the LCD before you get a

Replace Toner message.

Too Many Files

(MFC-9325CW only)

There are too many files stored

on the USB Flash memory drive.

Reduce the number of files stored on the

USB Flash memory drive.

Unusable Device

(MFC-9325CW only)

An incompatible or broken device

has been connected to the USB

direct interface.

Remove the USB Flash memory drive from

the USB direct interface.

WT Box End Soon The waste toner box is almost full. Buy a new waste toner box before you get a

Replace WT Box message.

Error Message Cause Action

150

Transferring your faxes or Fax

Journal report C

If the LCD shows:

Init Unable XX

Print Unable XX

Scan Unable XX

We recommend transferring your faxes to

another fax machine or to your PC. (See

Transferring faxes to another fax machine

on page 150 or Transferring faxes to your PC

on page 150.)

You can also transfer the Fax Journal report

to see if there are any faxes you need to

transfer. (See Transferring Fax Journal report

to another fax machine on page 150.)

Note

If there is an error message on the

machine’s LCD, after the faxes have been

transferred, disconnect the machine from

the power source for several minutes, and

then reconnect it.

Transferring faxes to another fax

machine C

If you have not set up your Station ID, you

cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Set your

station ID in the Quick Setup Guide.)

aPress Menu, 9, 0, 1.

bDo one of the following:

If the LCD shows No Data, there

are no faxes left in the machine’s

memory. Press Stop/Exit.

Enter the fax number to which faxes

will be forwarded.

cPress Black Start or Color Start.

Transferring faxes to your PC C

You can transfer the faxes from your

machine’s memory to your PC.

aMake sure that you have installed

MFL-Pro Suite on your PC, and then

turn on PC-Fax Receiving on the PC.

(For details about PC Fax Receive, see

PC-FAX receiving in the Software

User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)

bMake sure that you have set

PC Fax Receive on the machine.

(See PC Fax Receive on page 74.)

If faxes are in the machine’s memory

when you set up PC Fax Receive, the

LCD will ask if you want to transfer the

faxes to your PC.

cDo one of the following:

To transfer all faxes to your PC,

press 1. You will be asked if you want

a backup print.

To exit and leave the faxes in the

memory, press 2.

dPress Stop/Exit.

Transferring Fax Journal report to

another fax machine C

If you have not set up your Station ID, you

cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Set your

station ID in the Quick Setup Guide.)

aPress Menu, 9, 0, 2.

bEnter the fax number to which the Fax

Journal report will be forwarded.

cPress Start.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

151

Document jams C

If the document is jammed, follow the steps

below.

IMPORTANT

After removing a jammed document,

check that no paper scraps are left in the

machine that could cause another jam.

Document is jammed in the top of the

ADF unit C

aTake out any paper from the ADF that is

not jammed.

bOpen the ADF cover.

cPull the jammed document out to the

left.

dClose the ADF cover.

ePress Stop/Exit.

Document is jammed under the

document cover C

aTake out any paper from the ADF that is

not jammed.

bLift the document cover.

cPull the jammed document out to the

right.

dClose the document cover.

ePress Stop/Exit.

Document is jammed at the output

tray C

aTake out any paper from the ADF that is

not jammed.

bPull the jammed document out to the

right.

cPress Stop/Exit.

152

Paper jams C

To clear paper jams, please follow the steps

in this section.

IMPORTANT

Please confirm that you have installed all

toner cartridges and drum units in the

machine. Failure to install these items or

improper installation may cause a paper

jam in your Brother machine.

Note

If the error message remains, open and

close the top cover and fuser cover firmly

to reset the machine.

Note

The LCD names for the paper trays are as

follows:

• Standard paper tray: Tray

• Manual Feed Slot: Manual Feed

Paper is jammed in the Paper Tray C

If the LCD shows Jam Tray, follow these

steps:

aPull the paper tray completely out of the

machine.

bUse both hands to slowly pull out the

jammed paper.

IMPORTANT

If the paper cannot easily be removed in

this direction, stop and follow the

instructions for Paper is jammed inside the

machine on page 155.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

153

Note

Pulling out the jammed paper downwards

allows you to remove the paper easier.

cMake sure the paper is below the

maximum paper mark (b) of the paper

tray. While pressing the green paper-

guide release lever, slide the paper

guides to fit the paper size. Make sure

that the guides are firmly in the slots.

(See Loading paper in the standard

paper tray on page 11.)

dPut the paper tray firmly back in the

machine.

ePress Black Start or Color Start to

resume printing.

Paper is jammed at the output paper

tray C

When the paper is jammed at the output

paper tray, follow these steps:

aOpen the scanner using both hands.

Note

When the top cover is open, you cannot

open the scanner.

bPress down the green lever and remove

the paper.

cPush the scanner down with both hands

to close it.

154

Paper is jammed at the back of the

machine C

If the LCD shows Jam Rear, a paper jam

occurred behind the face-up output tray.

Follow these steps:

aTurn off the machine’s power switch.

Unplug the telephone line cord first,

disconnect all cables, and then unplug

the power cord from the AC power

outlet.

bOpen the back cover.

CAUTION

HOT SURFACE

After you have just used the machine, some

internal parts of the machine will be

extremely hot. Wait at least 10 minutes for

the machine to cool down before continuing

to the next step.

cPush down and pull the green tabs at

the left and right hand sides toward you

and fold down the fuser cover (1).

dUsing both hands, gently pull the

jammed paper out of the fuser unit.

eClose the fuser cover (1).

fFully close the back cover.

gPlug the machine’s power cord back into

the AC power outlet first, and reconnect

all cables and telephone line cord. Turn

on the machine’s power switch.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

155

Paper is jammed inside the machine C

If the LCD shows Jam Inside, follow these

steps:

aTurn off the machine’s power switch.

Unplug the telephone line cord first,

disconnect all cables, and then unplug

the power cord from the AC power

outlet. Leave the machine turned off for

10 minutes to cool down.

bFully open the top cover by lifting up on

the handle (1).

CAUTION

HOT SURFACE

After you have just used the machine, some

internal parts of the machine will be

extremely hot. Wait at least 10 minutes for

the machine to cool down before continuing

to the next step.

IMPORTANT

When the scanner is open, you cannot

open the top cover.

cTake out all the drum unit and toner

cartridge assemblies. Repeat this for all

the drum unit and toner cartridge

assemblies.

IMPORTANT

• We recommend that you place the drum

unit and toner cartridge assemblies on a

clean, flat surface with a sheet of

disposable paper or cloth underneath it in

case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.

• To prevent damage to the machine from

static electricity, DO NOT touch the

electrodes shown in the illustration.

• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If

toner scatters on your hands or clothes,

wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.

156

• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT

touch the shaded parts shown in the

illustrations.

dPull out the jammed paper slowly.

eSlide each drum unit and toner cartridge

assembly into the machine. Make sure

that you match the toner cartridge color

to the same color label on the machine.

Repeat this for all the drum unit and

toner cartridge assemblies.

C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black

fClose the top cover.

gPlug the machine’s power cord back into

the AC power outlet first, and reconnect

all cables and telephone line cord. Turn

on the machine’s power switch.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

157

Routine maintenance C

Clean the outside and inside of the machine

regularly with a dry, lint-free cloth. When you

replace the toner cartridge or the drum unit,

make sure that you clean the inside of the

machine. If printed pages are stained with

toner, clean the inside of the machine with a

dry, lint-free cloth.

WARNING

Use neutral detergents. Cleaning with

volatile liquids such as thinner or benzine

will damage the surface of the machine.

DO NOT use cleaning materials that

contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of

spray, or any type of flammable substance

to clean the outside or inside of the

machine. Doing this may cause a fire or

electrical shock. (For more information see

Important safety instructions on page 117.)

Be careful not to inhale toner.

Cleaning the outside of the

machine C

aTurn off the machine’s power switch.

Unplug the telephone line cord first,

disconnect all cables, and then unplug

the power cord from the AC power

outlet.

bPull the paper tray completely out of the

machine.

cWipe the outside of the machine with a

dry, lint-free soft cloth to remove dust.

dRemove any paper that is in the paper

tray.

158

eWipe the inside and the outside of the

paper tray with a dry, lint-free soft cloth

to remove dust.

fRe-load the paper and put the paper tray

firmly back in the machine.

gPlug the machine’s power cord back into

the AC power outlet first, and reconnect

all cables and telephone line cord. Turn

on the machine’s power switch.

Cleaning the scanner C

aTurn off the machine’s power switch.

Unplug the telephone line cord first,

disconnect all cables and then unplug

the power cord from the AC power

outlet.

bLift the document cover (1).

Clean the white plastic surface (2) and

scanner glass (3) underneath it with a

soft lint-free cloth moistened with water.

cIn the ADF unit, clean the white bar (1)

and the glass strip (2) underneath it with

a soft lint-free cloth moistened with

water.

dPlug the machine’s power cord back into

the AC power outlet first, and reconnect

all cables and telephone line cord. Turn

on the machine’s power switch.

Note

In addition to cleaning the scanner glass

and glass strip with a soft lint-free cloth

moistened with water, run your finger tip

over the glass to see if you can feel

anything on it. If you feel dirt or debris,

clean the glass again concentrating on

that area. You may need to repeat the

cleaning process three or four times. To

test, make a copy after each cleaning.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

159

Cleaning the LED heads C

WARNING

DO NOT use cleaning materials that

contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of

spray, or any type of flammable substance

to clean the inside or outside of the

machine. Doing this may cause a fire or

electrical shock. Use neutral detergents.

IMPORTANT

DO NOT touch the windows of the LED

heads with your fingers.

aBefore you clean the inside of the

machine, turn off the machine’s power

switch. Unplug the telephone line cord

first, and then unplug the power cord

from the AC power outlet.

bFully open the top cover by lifting up on

the handle (1).

IMPORTANT

When the scanner is open, you cannot

open the top cover.

cWipe the windows of the LED heads (1)

with a dry, lint-free cloth. Be careful not

to touch the windows of the LED

heads (1) with your fingers.

dClose the top cover of the machine.

ePlug the machine’s power cord back into

the AC power outlet first, and then plug

in the telephone line cord.Turn on the

machine’s power switch.

160

Cleaning the corona wires C

If you have print quality problems, clean the

corona wires as follows:

aTurn off the machine’s power switch.

Unplug the telephone line cord first,

disconnect all cables, and then unplug

the power cord from the AC power

outlet.

bFully open the top cover by lifting up on

the handle (1).

IMPORTANT

When the scanner is open, you cannot

open the top cover.

cTake out the drum unit and toner

cartridge assemblies.

IMPORTANT

• We recommend that you place the drum

unit and toner cartridge assembly on a

clean, flat surface with a sheet of

disposable paper or cloth underneath it in

case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.

• To prevent damage to the machine from

static electricity, DO NOT touch the

electrodes shown in the illustration.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

161

dClean the primary corona wire inside the

drum unit by gently sliding the green tab

from left to right and right to left several

times.

Note

Be sure to return the tab to the home

position (a) (1). If you do not, printed

pages may have a vertical stripe.

eSlide each drum unit and toner cartridge

assembly into the machine. Make sure

that you match the toner cartridge color

to the same color label on the machine.

C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black

fRepeat steps c to e to clean the

remaining corona wires.

gClose the top cover of the machine.

hPlug the machine’s power cord back into

the AC power outlet first, and then

reconnect all cables and telephone line

cord. Turn on the machine’s power

switch.

162

Cleaning the drum unit C

Small spots on the printed pages C

If your printout has any small white or colored

spots, follow the steps below to solve the

problem.

aOpen the manual feed slot cover.

bUsing both hands, slide the manual feed

slot paper guides to the width of the

paper that you are going to use.

cUsing both hands, put one blank sheet

of paper in the manual feed slot until the

front edge of the paper touches the

paper feed roller. Wait until the machine

automatically feeds the paper. When

you feel the machine pull in the paper,

let go.

Note

• Make sure that the paper is straight and in

the correct position on the manual feed

slot. If it is not, the paper may not be fed

properly, resulting in a paper jam.

• Do not put more than one piece of paper

in the manual feed slot at any one time, as

it may cause a jam.

• If you put paper in the manual feed slot

before the machine is in the Ready mode,

an error may occur and the machine will

stop printing.

dMake sure that the machine is in the

Ready mode.

Press Menu, 4, 8.

Drum Cleaning

Press Start

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

163

ePress Black Start or Color Start. The

machine will pull in the piece of paper

and start cleaning the drum unit.

Drum Cleaning

Please Wait

fWhen the machine has finished

cleaning, Completed appears on the

LCD. Press Stop/Exit so that the

machine returns to the Ready mode.

gRepeat steps c to f two more times

using a new blank sheet of paper each

time. Upon completion please discard

the used paper. If the print problem is

not resolved please contact Brother

Customer Service.

Large spots on the printed pages C

If your printout has colored spots at 3.7 in.

(94 mm) intervals, follow the steps below to

solve the problem.

aTurn off the machine’s power switch.

Unplug the telephone line cord first,

disconnect all cables, and then unplug

the power cord from the AC power

outlet.

bFully open the top cover by lifting up on

the handle (1).

IMPORTANT

When the scanner is open, you cannot

open the top cover.

164

cSee the print sample to identify the color

causing the problem. The color of the

spots is the color of the drum you should

clean. For example, if the spots are

cyan, you should clean the drum for

cyan. Take out the drum unit and toner

cartridge assembly of the color causing

the problem.

IMPORTANT

• We recommend that you place the drum

unit and toner cartridge assembly on a

clean, flat surface with a sheet of

disposable paper or cloth underneath it in

case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.

• To prevent damage to the machine from

static electricity, DO NOT touch the

electrodes shown in the illustration.

dPush down the green-labeled lock

lever (1) and take the toner cartridge out

of the drum unit.

IMPORTANT

Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If

toner scatters on your hands or clothes,

wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.

ePut the print sample in front of the drum

unit, and find the exact position of the

poor print.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

165

fTurn the drum unit gear by hand while

looking at the surface of the OPC

drum (1).

gWhen you have found the mark on the

drum that matches the print sample,

wipe the surface of the OPC drum with a

dry cotton swab until the dust or glue on

the surface comes off.

IMPORTANT

DO NOT clean the surface of the

photosensitive drum with a sharp object.

hPut the toner cartridge back firmly into

the drum unit until you hear it lock into

place.

Note

Make sure that you put in the toner

cartridge properly or it may separate from

the drum unit.

166

iSlide each drum unit and toner cartridge

assembly into the machine. Make sure

that you match the toner cartridge color

to the same color label on the machine.

C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black

jClose the top cover of the machine.

kPlug the machine’s power cord back into

the AC power outlet first, and then

reconnect all cables and telephone line

cord. Turn on the machine’s power

switch.

Cleaning the paper pick-up

rollers C

If you have paper feed problems, clean the

pick-up rollers as follows:

aTurn off the machine’s power switch.

Unplug the power cord from the AC

power outlet.

bPull the paper tray completely out of the

machine.

cTightly wring out a lint-free cloth soaked

in lukewarm water, and then wipe the

separator pad (1) of the paper tray with

it to remove dust.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

167

dWipe the two pick-up rollers (1) inside of

the machine to remove dust.

ePut the paper tray back in the machine.

fPlug the machine’s power cord back into

the AC power outlet. Turn on the

machine’s power switch.

Calibration C

The output density for each color may vary

depending on the environment the machine is

in such as temperature and humidity.

Calibration helps you to improve the color

density.

aPress Menu, 4, 5.

bPress a or b to select Calibrate.

cPress OK.

dPress 1 to select Yes.

ePress Stop/Exit.

You can reset the calibration parameters

back to those set at the factory.

aPress Menu, 4, 5.

bPress a or b to Reset.

cPress OK.

dPress 1 to select Yes.

ePress Stop/Exit.

Note

• If an error message is displayed, press

Stop/Exit and try again. For more

information, see Error and maintenance

messages on page 144.

• If you print using Windows® printer driver,

you need to perform the calibration from

the Windows® printer driver. See

Advanced tab in the Software User's

Guide on the CD-ROM.

• If you print using the Macintosh printer

driver, you need to perform the calibration

using the status monitor. See Status

Monitor in the Software User's Guide on

the CD-ROM. When the Status Monitor

is open, choose Control / Color

Calibration from the menu bar.

168

Auto Registration C

Registration C

If solid areas of color or images have cyan,

magenta or yellow fringes, you can use the

auto-registration feature to correct the

problem.

aPress Menu, 4, 6, 1.

bTo start, press 1.

To exit, press 2.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Manual Registration C

If color still appears incorrectly after auto-

registration, you will need to perform manual

registration.

aPress Menu, 4, 7, 1.

bPress Black Start or Color Start to

start printing the color registration chart.

cWhen the machine has finished printing

the registration sheet, press 2

(Set Regist.) to correct the color

manually.

dStarting at 1 (Magenta) on the chart,

check which colored bar has the most

uniform print density and enter its

number into the machine using the a

and b keys.

Press OK.

Repeat for 2 (Cyan), 3 (Yellow), 4, 5, 6

to 9.

ePress Stop/Exit.

Frequency (Color Correction)C

You can set how often the color correction

(Color Calibration and Auto Registration)

occurs. The default setting is Normal. The

color correction process consumes some

amount of the toner.

aPress Menu, 4, 9.

bPress a or b to choose Normal, Low or

Off.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

169

Replacing the consumable items C

The following messages appear on the LCD in the Ready mode. These messages provide

advanced warnings to replace the consumable items before they reach the end of their life. To

avoid any inconvenience, you may want to buy spare consumable items before the machine stops

printing.

1A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.

2Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

31 page per job.

4Drum life is approximate and may vary by type of use.

5Contains 4 pc. Drum Set.

6Contains 1 pc. Black Drum Unit.

7Contains 1 pc. Color Drum Unit.

LCD messages Consumable item

to replace

Approximate life How to replace Order No.

Toner Low

Prepare New X

Toner Cartridge.

Toner cartridge

X = Cyan,

Magenta, Yellow,

Black

<Black>

2,200 pages 12

<Cyan, Magenta,

Yellow>

1,400 pages 12

See page 171. TN-210BK,

TN-210C,

TN-210M,

TN-210Y

Drums End Soon 4 Drum units 15,000 pages 134 See page 177. DR-210CL 5

Drum End Soon(X)

1 Drum unit

X = C, M, Y, K

C = Cyan

M = Magenta

Y = Yellow

K = Black

15,000 pages 134 See page 177. DR-210CL-BK 6,

DR-210CL-CMY 7

Belt End Soon Belt unit 50,000 pages 1See page 181. BU-200CL

WT Box End Soon

Waste toner box 50,000 pages 1See page 185. WT-200CL

170

You will need to replace certain parts and clean the machine regularly.

1A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.

2Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

31 page per job.

4Drum life is approximate and may vary by type of use.

5Contains 4 pc. Drum Set.

6Contains 1 pc. Black Drum Unit.

7Contains 1 pc. Color Drum Unit.

8The Drum Error message has two cases: If the scroll message shows Replace the Drum Unit. you will need

to replace the drum unit. If the scroll message shows Slide the Green tab on Drum Unit. you do not need

to replace the drum unit, you just need to clean the corona wires. (See Cleaning the corona wires on page 160.)

LCD messages Consumable item

to replace

Approximate life How to replace Order No.

Replace Toner Toner cartridge <Black>

2,200 pages 12

<Cyan,

Magenta,Yellow>

1,400 pages 12

See page 171. TN-210BK,

TN-210C,

TN-210M,

TN-210Y

Replace Drums 4 Drum units 15,000 pages 134 See page 177. DR-210CL 5

Replace Drum(X)

1 Drum unit

X = C, M, Y, K

C = Cyan

M = Magenta

Y = Yellow

K = Black

15,000 pages 134 See page 177. DR-210CL-BK 6,

DR-210CL-CMY 7

Drum Error 8Drum unit 15,000 pages 134 See page 177.

Replace Belt Belt unit 50,000 pages 1See page 181. BU-200CL

Replace WT Box Waste toner box 50,000 pages 1See page 185. WT-200CL

Replace Fuser Fuser unit 50,000 pages 1Call your dealer or Brother Customer

Service for a replacement fuser unit.

Replace PF Kit Paper feeding kit 50,000 pages 1Call your dealer or Brother Customer

Service for a replacement paper feeding

kit 1.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

171

Note

• Go to http://www.brother.com/original/index.html for instructions on how to return your used

consumable items to the Brother collection program. If you choose not to return your used

consumable, please discard the used consumable according to local regulations, keeping it

separate from domestic waste. If you have questions, call your local waste disposal office.

• We recommend placing used consumable items on a piece of paper to prevent accidentally

spilling or scattering the material inside.

• If you use paper that is not a direct equivalent for the recommended paper, the life of

consumable items and machine parts may be reduced.

• The projected life of the toner cartridges is based on ISO/IEC 19798. Frequency of

replacement will vary depending on the complexity of printed pages, percentage of coverage

and type of media used.

Replacing a Toner cartridge C

The Standard toner cartridges can print

approximately 2,200 pages (black) or

approximately 1,400 pages (yellow, magenta,

cyan) 1. Actual page count will vary

depending on your average type of

document. The machine is supplied with a

Starter toner cartridge that will need to be

replaced after approximately 1,000 pages 1.

When a toner cartridge is running low, the

LCD shows Toner Low.

1Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance

with ISO/IEC 19798.

Note

• It is a good idea to keep a new toner

cartridge ready for use when you see the

Toner Low warning.

• To ensure high quality printing, we

recommend that use only Genuine

Brother Brand toner cartridges. When you

want to buy toner cartridges, please call

Brother Customer Service.

•

We recommend that you clean the machine

when you replace the toner cartridge. See

Routine maintenance on page 157

• If you change the print density setting for

lighter or darker printing, the amount of

toner used will change.

• Wait to unpack the toner cartridge until

immediately before you put it into the

machine.

Toner Low message C

Toner Low

Prepare...

If the LCD shows Toner Low

Prepare New X Toner Cartridge., the

machine has nearly run out of toner. Buy a

new toner cartridge and have it ready before

you get a Replace Toner message. The

LCD shows the toner color that is near the

end of its life (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow or

Black).

Replace Toner message C

When the following message appears on the

LCD, you need to replace the toner cartridge:

Replace Toner

The scrolling message on the LCD indicates

which color you need to replace.

aTurn off the machine’s power switch.

Unplug the telephone line cord first, and

then unplug the power cord from the AC

power outlet.

172

bFully open the top cover by lifting up on

the handle (1).

IMPORTANT

When the scanner is open, you cannot

open the top cover.

cTake out the drum unit and toner

cartridge assembly for the color shown

on the LCD.

dPush down the green-labeled lock

lever (1) and take the toner cartridge out

of the drum unit.

WARNING

DO NOT put a toner cartridge into a fire. It

could explode, resulting in injuries.

DO NOT use cleaning materials that

contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of

spray or any type of flammable substance

to clean the inside or outside of the

machine. Doing this may cause a fire or

electrical shock. See Routine maintenance

on page 157 for how to clean the machine.

Be careful not to inhale toner.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

173

IMPORTANT

• We recommend that you place the drum

unit and toner cartridge assembly on a

clean, flat, level, stable surface with a

sheet of disposable paper or cloth

underneath it in case you accidentally spill

or scatter toner.

• To prevent damage to the machine from

static electricity, DO NOT touch the

electrodes shown in the illustration.

• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If

toner scatters on your hands or clothes,

wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.

• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT

touch the shaded parts shown in the

illustrations.

Note

• Be sure to seal up the toner cartridge

tightly in a suitable bag so that toner

powder does not spill out of the cartridge.

•Go to

http://www.brother.com/original/index.html

for instructions on how to return your used

consumable items to the Brother

collection program. If you choose not to

return your used consumable, please

discard the used consumable according to

local regulations, keeping it separate from

domestic waste. If you have questions,

call your local waste disposal office.

eClean the primary corona wire inside the

drum unit by gently sliding the green tab

from left to right and right to left several

times.

Note

Be sure to return the tab to the home

position (a) (1). If you do not, printed

pages may have a vertical stripe.

174

fUnpack the new toner cartridge. Gently

shake it from side to side several times

to distribute the toner evenly inside the

cartridge.

IMPORTANT

• Wait to unpack the new toner cartridge

until immediately before you put it in the

machine. If a toner cartridge is left

unpacked for a long time, the toner life will

be shortened.

• If an unpacked drum unit is put in direct

sunlight or room light, the unit may be

damaged.

CAUTION

HOT SURFACE

Put the toner cartridge in the drum unit

immediately after you have removed the

protective cover. To prevent any

degradation to the print quality, DO NOT

touch the shaded parts shown in the

illustrations.

IMPORTANT

Brother strongly recommends that you

DO NOT refill the toner cartridge provided

with your machine. We also strongly

recommend that you continue to use only

Genuine Brother Brand replacement toner

cartridges. Use or attempted use of

potentially incompatible toner and/or

cartridges in the Brother machine may

cause damage to the machine and/or may

result in unsatisfactory print quality. Our

warranty coverage does not apply to any

problem that is caused by the use of

unauthorized third party toner and/or

cartridges. To protect your investment and

obtain premium performance from the

Brother machine, we strongly recommend

the use of Genuine Brother Supplies.

gPull off the protective cover.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

175

hPut the new toner cartridge firmly into

the drum unit until you hear it lock into

place.

Note

Make sure that you put in the toner

cartridge properly or it may separate from

the drum unit.

iSlide the drum unit and toner cartridge

assembly into the machine. Make sure

that you match the toner cartridge color

to the same color label on the machine.

C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black

jClose the top cover of the machine.

kPlug the machine’s power cord back into

the AC power outlet first, and reconnect

all cables and the telephone line cord.

Turn on the machine’s power switch.

Note

DO NOT turn off the machine’s power

switch or open the top cover until the LCD

returns to the Ready mode.

IMPORTANT

While removing the drum unit, handle it

carefully because it may contain toner. If

toner scatters on your hands or clothes,

wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.

176

Drum units C

Order No. DR-210CL 4 pc. Drum Set or single

drums DR-210CL-BK, DR-210CL-CMY

A new drum unit can print approximately

15,000 A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.

DR-210CL Drum Set contains 4 drum units

1 Black (DR-210CL-BK) and 3 Color

(DR-210CL-CMY). DR-210CL-BK contains

1 Black drum. DR-210CL-CMY contains

1 Color drum.

Drum wear and tear occurs due to use and

rotation of the drum and interaction with

paper, toner and other materials in the paper

path. In designing this product, Brother

decided to use the number of rotations of the

drum as a reasonable determinant of the

drum life. When a drum reaches the

factory-established rotation limit

corresponding to the rated page yield, the

product LCD display will advise you to

replace the applicable drum(s). The product

will continue to function; however, print

quality may not be optimal.

As the drums rotate in unison during the

various stages of operation (regardless of

whether toner is deposited on the page) and

because damage to a single drum unit is not

likely, you will need to replace all of the drums

at once (unless you have replaced an

individual drum [DR-210CL-BK for black and

DR-210CL-CMY for Color] for reasons other

than reaching its rated life). For your

convenience, Brother sells the drum units as

a set of four (DR-210CL).

Note

• There are many factors that determine the

actual drum life, such as the temperature,

humidity, type of paper, type of toner used

and so on. Under ideal conditions, the

average drum life is estimated at

approximately 15,000 pages. The actual

number of pages that your drum will print

may be significantly less than this

estimate. Because we have no control

over the many factors that determine the

actual drum life, we cannot guarantee a

minimum number of pages that will be

printed by your drum.

• For best performance, use only genuine

Brother toner. The machine should be

used only in a clean, dust-free

environment with adequate ventilation.

• Printing with a third-party drum unit may

reduce not only the print quality but also

the quality and life of the machine itself.

Warranty coverage does not apply to

problems caused by the use of a

third-party drum unit.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

177

Drum End Soon messages C

Drums End Soon

If the LCD shows Drums End Soon, it

means the 4 drum units are near the end of

their life. Buy a new drum unit set

(DR-210CL) and have it ready before you get

a Replace Drums message. To replace the

drum units, see Replacing the drum units

on page 177.

Drum End Soon(X)

If only a specified drum is near the end of its

life, the LCD shows the Drum End Soon(X)

message. (X) indicates the drum unit color

that is near the end of its life. ((K) =Black,

(Y)=Yellow, (M)=Magenta, (C)=Cyan). Buy a

new drum unit DR-210CL-BK (for Black) or a

DR-210CL-CMY (for either Y, M, C colors)

and have it ready before you get a

Replace Drums message. To replace the

drum units, see Replacing the drum units

on page 177.

Replace Drums messages C

When the following message appears on the

LCD, you need to replace the drum units:

Replace Drums

If only the specified drum needs to be

replaced, the LCD shows the

Replace Drum(X) message. (X) indicates

the drum unit color that you need to replace.

((K)=Black, (Y)=Yellow, (M)=Magenta,

(C)=Cyan).

Drum Error

1Only the color you need to replace will be shown

The Drum Error message has two cases: If

the scrolling message shows

Replace the Drum Unit. you will need

to replace the drum unit. If the scrolling

message shows

Slide the Green tab on Drum Unit.

you do not need to replace the drum unit, you

just need to clean the corona wires. (See

Cleaning the corona wires on page 160.)

Replacing the drum units C

IMPORTANT

• While removing the drum unit, handle it

carefully because it may contain toner. If

toner scatters on your hands or clothes,

wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.

• Every time you replace the drum unit,

clean the inside of the machine. (See

Routine maintenance on page 157.)

aTurn off the machine’s power switch.

Unplug the telephone line cord first, and

then unplug the power cord from the AC

power outlet.

Replace the Drum Unit. Black/

Cyan/ Magenta/ Yellow. Refer to

the User’s Guide. 1

178

bFully open the top cover by lifting up on

the handle (1).

IMPORTANT

When the scanner is open, you cannot

open the top cover.

cTake out the drum unit and toner

cartridge assembly for the color shown

on the LCD.

dPush down the green-labeled lock

lever (1) and take the toner cartridge out

of the drum unit.

WARNING

DO NOT put a toner cartridge into a fire. It

could explode, resulting in injuries.

DO NOT use cleaning materials that

contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of

spray, or any type of flammable substance

to clean the outside or inside of the

machine. Doing this may cause a fire or

electrical shock. See Routine maintenance

on page 157 for how to clean the machine.

Be careful not to inhale toner.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

179

IMPORTANT

• We recommend that you place the drum

unit and toner cartridge assembly on a

clean, flat surface with a sheet of

disposable paper or cloth underneath it in

case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.

• To prevent damage to the machine from

static electricity, DO NOT touch the

electrodes shown in the illustration.

• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If

toner scatters on your hands or clothes,

wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.

• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT

touch the shaded parts shown in the

illustrations.

Note

• Be sure to seal up the toner cartridge

tightly in a suitable bag so that toner

powder does not spill out of the cartridge.

•Go to

http://www.brother.com/original/index.html

for instructions on how to return your used

consumable items to the Brother

collection program. If you choose not to

return your used consumable, please

discard the used consumable according to

local regulations, keeping it separate from

domestic waste. If you have questions,

call your local waste disposal office.

eUnpack the new drum unit and remove

the protective cover.

IMPORTANT

Wait to unpack the new drum unit until

immediately before you put it in the

machine. Exposure to direct sunlight or

room light may damage the drum unit.

180

fPut the toner cartridge firmly into the

new drum unit until you hear it lock into

place.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that you put in the toner

cartridge properly or it may separate from

the drum unit.

gSlide the drum unit and toner cartridge

assembly into the machine. Make sure

that you match the toner cartridge color

to the same color label on the machine.

C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black

hClose the top cover of the machine.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

181

Resetting the drum counter C

When you replace a drum unit with a new

one, you need to reset the drum counter by

completing the following steps:

aPlug the machine’s power cord back into

the AC power outlet first, and reconnect

all cables and telephone line cord. Turn

on the machine’s power switch.

b(For MFC-9325CW) Press Menu, 8, 4.

(For MFC-9125CN) Press Menu, 6, 4.

cPress aor b to choose the color of the

drum you replaced. Press OK.

dPress 1 to reset the drum unit counter.

ePress Stop/Exit.

Replacing the belt unit C

Order No. BU-200CL

A new belt unit can print approximately

50,000 A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.

Belt End Soon message C

Belt End Soon

If the LCD shows Belt End Soon, it means

the belt unit is near the end of its life. Buy a

new belt unit and have it ready before you get

a Replace Belt message.

Replace Belt message C

When the following message appears on the

LCD, you need to replace the belt unit:

Replace Belt

IMPORTANT

• DO NOT touch the surface of the belt unit.

If you touch it, it could degrade print

quality.

• Damage caused by incorrect handling of

the belt unit may void your warranty.

aTurn off the machine’s power switch.

Unplug the telephone line cord first, and

then unplug the power cord from the AC

power outlet.

bFully open the top cover by lifting up on

the handle (1).

IMPORTANT

When the scanner is open, you cannot

open the top cover.

182

cTake out all the drum unit and toner

cartridge assemblies.

IMPORTANT

• We recommend that you place the drum

unit and toner cartridge assembly on a

clean, flat surface with a sheet of

disposable paper or cloth underneath it in

case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.

• To prevent damage to the machine from

static electricity, DO NOT touch the

electrodes shown in the illustration.

• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If

toner scatters on your hands or clothes,

wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.

• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT

touch the shaded parts shown in the

illustrations.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

183

dHold the green handle of the belt unit

and lift the belt unit up, then pull it out.

IMPORTANT

To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT

touch the shaded parts shown in the

illustration.

184

eUnpack the new belt unit and put the

new belt unit in the machine.

fSlide each drum unit and toner cartridge

assembly into the machine. Make sure

that you match the toner cartridge color

to the same color label on the machine.

Repeat this for all the drum unit and

toner cartridge assemblies.

C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black

gClose the top cover of the machine.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

185

When you replace a belt unit with a new

one, you need to reset the belt unit

counter by completing the following

steps: C

aPlug the machine’s power cord back into

the AC power outlet first, and reconnect

all cables and telephone line cord. Turn

on the machine’s power switch.

b(For MFC-9325CW) Press Menu, 8, 4.

(For MFC-9125CN) Press Menu, 6, 4.

cPress a or b to select Belt Unit.

Press OK.

dPress 1 to reset the belt unit counter.

ePress Stop/Exit.

Replacing the waste toner boxC

Order No. WT-200CL

A new waste toner box can print

approximately 50,000 A4 or Letter size

single-sided pages.

WT Box End Soon message C

WT Box End Soon

If the LCD shows WT Box End Soon, it

means the waste toner box is near the end of

its life. Buy a new waste toner box and have

it ready before you get a Replace WT Box

message.

Replace WT Box message C

When the following message appears on the

LCD, you need to replace the waste toner box:

Replace WT Box

IMPORTANT

DO NOT reuse the waste toner box.

WARNING

DO NOT put the waste toner box into a fire.

It could explode.

Be careful not to spill the toner. DO NOT

inhale or allow it to get into your eyes.

aTurn off the machine’s power switch.

Unplug the telephone line cord first, and

then unplug the power cord from the AC

power outlet.

bFully open the top cover by lifting up on

the handle (1).

IMPORTANT

When the scanner is open, you cannot

open the top cover.

186

cTake out all the drum unit and toner

cartridge assemblies.

IMPORTANT

• We recommend that you place the drum

unit and toner cartridge assembly on a

clean, flat surface with a sheet of

disposable paper or cloth underneath it in

case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.

• To prevent damage to the machine from

static electricity, DO NOT touch the

electrodes shown in the illustration.

• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If

toner scatters on your hands or clothes,

wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.

• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT

touch the shaded parts shown in the

illustrations.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

187

dHold the green handle of the belt unit

and lift the belt unit up, then pull it out.

IMPORTANT

To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT

touch the shaded parts shown in the

illustration.

188

eRemove the orange packing material

and discard it.

Note

This step is only necessary when you are

replacing the waste toner box for the first

time. The orange packing is installed at

the factory to protect your machine during

shipment. The orange packing is not

required for replacement waste toner

boxes.

fHold the green handle of the waste toner

box and remove the waste toner box

from the machine.

CAUTION

Handle the waste toner box carefully in

case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.

If toner scatters on your hands or clothes,

wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.

Note

Discard the used waste toner box

according to local regulations, keeping it

separate from domestic waste. If you have

questions, call your local waste disposal

office.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

189

gUnpack the new waste toner box and

put the new waste toner box in the

machine.

hPut the belt unit in the machine.

iSlide each drum unit and toner cartridge

assembly into the machine. Make sure

that you match the toner cartridge color

to the same color label on the machine.

Repeat this for all the drum unit and

toner cartridge assemblies.

C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black

jClose the top cover of the machine.

190

Replacing periodic

maintenance parts C

The periodic maintenance parts will need to

be replaced regularly to maintain the print

quality. The parts listed below will have to be

replaced after printing approximately

50,000 pages 1. Please call Brother

Customer Service when the following

messages appear on the LCD.

1A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.

Machine Information C

Checking the Serial Number C

You can see the machine’s Serial Number on

the LCD.

a(For MFC-9325CW) Press Menu, 8, 1.

(For MFC-9125CN) Press Menu, 6, 1.

Machine Info.

1.Serial No.

bPress Stop/Exit.

Checking the Page Counters C

You can see the machine’s Page Counters

for copies, printed pages, reports and lists,

faxes or a summary total.

a(For MFC-9325CW) Press Menu, 8, 2.

(For MFC-9125CN) Press Menu, 6, 2.

Machine Info.

2.Page Counter

bPress a or b to see Total, Fax/List,

Copy or Print.

cPress Stop/Exit.

LCD message Description

Replace PF Kit

Replace the paper feeding kit

for the paper tray.

Replace Fuser

Replace the fuser unit.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

191

Checking the remaining life of

parts C

You can see the machine’s parts life on the

LCD.

a(For MFC-9325CW) Press Menu, 8, 3.

(For MFC-9125CN) Press Menu, 6, 3.

Machine Info.

3.Parts Life

bPress a or b to choose 1.Drum,

2.Belt Unit, 3.PF Kit or

4.Fuser.

Press OK.

cPress Stop/Exit.

Note

The life check will be accurate only if you

have reset the part counter when you

installed a new part. It will not be accurate

if that part’s life counter was reset during

the life of the used part.

Reset functions C

The following reset functions are available:

1Network

You can reset the print server back to its

default factory settings such as the

password and IP address information.

2Address & Fax

Address & Fax resets the following

settings:

Address Book

(One Touch Dial/Speed Dial/Setup

Groups)

Programmed fax jobs in the memory

(Polled TX, Delayed Fax)

Station ID

(name and number)

Coverpage Msg

(comments)

Remote Fax Option

(Remote Access Code, Fax Storage,

Fax Forwarding, Paging and PC-Fax)

Report settings

(Transmission Verification Report/Tel

Index List/Fax Journal)

Setting Lock password

3All Settings

You can reset all the machine settings

back to the settings that were set at the

factory.

Brother strongly recommends you

perform this operation when you dispose

of the machine.

Note

Unplug the interface cable before you

choose Network or All Settings.

192

How to reset the machine C

a(USA) Press Menu, 0, 6.

(Canada) Press Menu, 0, 7.

Initial Setup

6.Reset

bPress a or b to choose the reset function

you want to use.

Press OK.

cDo one of the following;

To reset the settings, press 1 and go

to step d.

To exit without making changes,

press 2 and go to step e.

dYou will be asked to reboot the machine.

Do one of the following;

To reboot the machine press 1. The

machine will begin the reset.

To exit without rebooting the

machine, press 2. Go to step e.

ePress Stop/Exit.

Note

You can also reset the Network settings

by pressing Menu, 7, 0 (for

MFC-9325CW) or Menu, 5, 0 (for

MFC-9125CN).

Packing and shipping

the machine C

When you transport the machine, use the

packing materials that came with your

machine. If you do not pack the machine

properly, you could void your warranty. The

machine should be adequately insured with

the carrier.

CAUTION

When shipping the machine, each DRUM

UNIT / TONER CARTRIDGE ASSEMBLY

and the WASTE TONER BOX must be

removed from the machine and put in a

plastic bag. Failure to remove these items

and put them in plastic bags before

shipping may cause severe damage to the

machine and may VOID THE WARRANTY.

Make sure that you have the following parts

for repacking:

1 Plastic bags - to be supplied by you, the

user; one for the waste toner box, and one

each for the four drum and toner cartridge

assemblies

2 Protective covers that were attached to the

original drum and toner cartridge

assemblies

3 Packing material for locking the belt unit

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

193

WARNING

This machine is heavy and weighs

approximately

50.5 lb. (

22.9 kg

)

. To prevent

injuries use at least two people to lift the

machine. Be careful not to pinch your fingers

when you put the machine back down.

IMPORTANT

If you pack the machine soon after turning

off the power make sure the machine has

cooled down completely.

aTurn off the machine’s power switch.

bUnplug the machine from the telephone

wall jack.

cUnplug all the cables and AC power

cord from the machine.

dFully open the top cover and take out all

the drum unit and toner cartridge

assemblies.

CAUTION

DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in

the illustration.

194

eAttach the protective cover to each of

the drum unit and toner cartridge

assemblies.

fPut each assembly into a plastic bag

and completely seal each bag.

gRemove the belt unit by holding the

green handle and lifting the belt unit up

and out of the machine.

hRemove the waste toner box from the

machine, and then put it in a plastic bag

and seal the bag completely.

iReinstall the belt unit back in the

machine.

Troubleshooting and routine maintenance

195

jReinstall the original packing material in

the machine.

kClose the top cover.

lPut the waste toner box and one drum

unit and toner cartridges assembly in

the Styrofoam piece.

mUsing two people, place the machine

into the plastic bag.

nPut the machine and the Styrofoam

pieces into the carton. Match the front

side of the machine to the “FRONT”

mark on the Styrofoam pieces. Put the

Styrofoam pieces for the drum unit and

toner cartridge assemblies on the top of

the machine.

oPut the power cord, and the three

remaining drum unit and toner cartridge

assemblies into the Styrofoam pieces as

shown in the illustration.

196

pPut the four carton trays on the top.

Note

If you are returning your machine to

Brother as part of the Exchange Service,

pack only the machine. Keep all separate

parts, including the drum unit and toner

cartridge assemblies, and printed

materials to use with your ‘Exchange’

machine.

qClose the carton and tape it shut.

197

On-screen

programming D

Your machine has been designed to be easy

to use. The LCD provides on-screen

programming using the menu keys.

We have created step by step on-screen

instructions to help you program your

machine. Simply follow the steps as they

guide you through the menu selections and

programming options.

Menu table D

You can program your machine by using the

Menu table on page 199. These pages list

the menu selections and options.

Press Menu followed by the menu numbers

to program your machine.

For example, to set Beeper volume to Low:

aPress Menu, 1, 3, 2.

bPress a or b to choose Low.

cPress OK.

Memory storage D

Your menu settings are stored permanently,

and in the event of a power failure will not be

lost. Temporary settings (for example,

Contrast, Overseas Mode) will be lost. Also,

during a power failure the machine will retain

the date and time and any fax messages that

are in the memory for approximately

60 hours.

Menu keys D

Menu and features D

Access the menu.

Go to the next menu level.

Accept an option.

Exit the menu by pressing

repeatedly.

Go back to the previous

menu level.

Scroll through the current

menu level.

Go back to the previous

menu level or forward to the

next menu level.

Exit the menu or stop the

current operation.

198

How to access the menu

mode D

aPress Menu.

bChoose an option.

MFC-9125CN:

Press 1 for General Setup menu.

Press 2 for Fax menu.

Press 3 for Copy menu.

Press 4 for Printer menu.

Press 5 for Network menu.

Press 6 for Machine Info. menu.

Press 9 for Service menu. 1

Press 0 for Initial Setup menu.

MFC-9325CW:

Press 1 for General Setup menu.

Press 2 for Fax menu.

Press 3 for Copy menu.

Press 4 for Printer menu.

Press 5 for USB Direct I/F menu.

Press 6 for Print Reports menu.

Press 7 for Network menu.

Press 8 for Machine Info. menu.

Press 9 for Service menu. 1

Press 0 for Initial Setup menu.

1This will appear only when the LCD shows an

error message.

You can also scroll through each menu

level by pressing a or b for the direction

you want.

cPress OK when the option you want

appears on the LCD.

The LCD will then show the next menu

level.

dPress a or b to scroll to your next menu

selection.

ePress OK.

When you have finished setting an

option, the LCD will show Accepted.

fPress Stop/Exit to exit Menu mode.

Menu and features

199

Menu table D

The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.

Choose & OK Choose & OK to accept to exit

Main Menu Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

1.General

Setup

1.Mode Timer ——0 Sec

30 Secs

1 Min

2 Mins*

5 Mins

Off

Sets the time to

return to Fax mode

and the time the

machine will change

from individual user

to public user when

using Secure

Function Lock.

2.Paper 1.

Paper Type

Thin

Plain*

Thick

Thicker

Recycled Pap

Sets the type of

paper in the paper

tray.

Paper Size

Letter*

Legal

Executive

A5 L

Folio

Sets the size of the

paper in the paper

tray.

200

1.General

Setup

(Continued)

3.Volume 1.Ring Off

Low

Med*

High

Adjusts the ring

volume.

2.Beeper Off

Low

Med*

High

Adjusts the volume

level of the beeper.

3.Speaker Off

Low

Med*

High

Adjusts the speaker

volume.

Auto Daylight

—On

Off*

Changes for Daylight

Savings Time

automatically.

5.Ecology 1.Toner Save On

Off*

Increases the page

yield of the toner

cartridge.

2.Sleep Time Range varies

depending on

model.

005Min*

Conserves power. 27

LCD Contrast

—b-nnnno+a

b-nnnon+a

b-nnonn+a*

b-nonnn+a

b-onnnn+a

Adjusts the contrast

of the LCD.

7.Security 1.Memory Security

(MFC-9125CN only)

— Stops unauthorized

users from most

operations except

receiving faces into

the memory.

1.Function Lock

(MFC-9325CW only)

— Can restrict selected

machine operation

for up to 25 individual

users and all other

non-authorized

Public users.

2.Setting Lock — Stops unauthorized

users from changing

the machine’s

current settings.

Main Menu Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

Menu and features

201

1.General

Setup

(Continued)

Document Scan

1.Glass ScanSize A4

Letter*

Adjusts the scan

area of the scanner

glass to the size of

the document.

File Size

1.Color Small

Middle*

Large

You can set your own

default settings of the

data compression

rate.

See

Software

User’s

Guide

on the

CD-ROM.

2.Gray Small

Middle*

Large

Main Menu Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

202

Main Menu Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

2.Fax 1.Setup Receive

(In Fax mode only)

1.Ring Delay 00

04*

Sets the number of

rings before the

machine answers in

Fax Only or Fax/Tel

mode.

F/T Ring Time

20 Secs*

30 Secs

40 Secs

70 Secs

Sets the

pseudo/double-ring

time in Fax/Tel mode.

Easy Receive

On*

Off

Receives fax

messages without

pressing Start.

Remote Codes

On* (l51, #51)

Off

Allows you to answer

all calls at an

extension or external

telephone and use

codes to turn the

machine on or off.

You can personalize

these codes.

Auto Reduction

On*

Off

Cuts the size of

incoming faxes.

Print Density

b -onn+ a

b -non+ a*

b -nno+ a

Makes printouts

darker or lighter.

7.Polling RX — Sets up your machine

to poll another fax

machine.

Fax Rx Stamp

Off*

Prints the received

time and date on the

top of the received

faxes.

2.Setup Send

(In Fax mode only)

1.Contrast Auto*

Light

Dark

Changes the

lightness or darkness

of faxes you send.

Fax Resolution

Standard*

Fine

S.Fine

Photo

Sets the default

resolution for

outgoing faxes.

Menu and features

203

2.Fax

(Continued)

2.Setup Send

(In Fax mode only)

(Continued)

3.Delayed Fax — Sets the time of day in

24 hour format that

the delayed faxes will

be sent.

4.Batch TX On

Off*

Combines delayed

faxes going to the

same fax number at

the same time of day

into one transmission.

Real Time TX

Next Fax:On

Next Fax:Off

Off*

Sends a fax without

using the memory.

6.Polled TX On

Off*

Sets up your machine

with a document to be

retrieved by another

fax machine.

Coverpg Setup

Next Fax:On*

Next Fax:Off

Off

Print Sample

Automatically sends a

cover page you have

programmed.

Coverpage Msg

— Sets up your own

comments for the fax

cover page.

Overseas Mode

Off*

If you are having

difficulty sending

faxes overseas, set

this to On.

3.Address Book 1.

One Touch Dial

— Stores up to 8 One

Touch Dial numbers,

so you can dial by

pressing one key

(and Start).

2.Speed Dial — Stores up to 200

Speed Dial numbers,

so you can dial by

pressing only a few

keys (and Start).

Setup Groups

— Sets up to 20 Group

numbers for

Broadcasting.

Main Menu Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

204

2.Fax

(Continued)

4.Report Setting 1.

Transmission

On+Image

Off*

Off+Image

Sets initial setup for

Transmission

Verification Report.

Journal Period

Off

Every 50 Faxes*

Every 6 Hours

Every 12 Hours

Every 24 Hours

Every 2 Days

Every 7 Days

Sets the interval for

automatic printing of

the Fax Journal.

5.Remote Fax Opt 1.

Fwd/Page/Store

Off*

Fax Forward

Paging

Fax Storage

PC Fax Receive

Sets the machine to

forward fax

messages, to call

your pager, to store

incoming faxes in the

memory (so you can

retrieve them while

you are away from

your machine), or to

send faxes to your

PC.

(Backup Print) If you choose

Fax Forward or PC

Fax Receive, you can

turn on the safety

feature Backup Print.

Remote Access

---lSets your own code

for Remote Retrieval.

3.Print Fax — Prints incoming faxes

stored in the memory.

6.Dial Restrict. 1.Dial Pad Off*

Enter # twice

You can set the

machine to restrict

dialing when using

the dial pad.

One Touch Dial

Off*

Enter # twice

You can set the

machine to restrict

the dialing of

One Touch numbers.

3.Speed Dial Off*

Enter # twice

You can set the

machine to restrict

the dialing of Speed

Dial numbers.

7.Remaining Jobs — — You can check which

jobs are in the

memory and lets you

cancel scheduled

jobs.

Main Menu Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

Menu and features

205

2.Fax

(Continued)

0.Miscellaneous 1.

Compatibility

High*

Normal

Basic(for VoIP)

Adjusts the

equalization for

transmission

difficulties.

VoIP service

providers offer fax

support using various

standards. If you

regularly experience

fax transmission

errors, choose

Basic(for VoIP).

143

2.Distinctive Off*

Set

Uses the telephone

company’s Distinctive

Ring subscriber

service to register the

ring pattern with the

machine.

3.Caller ID Display#

Print Report

View or print a list of

the last 30 Caller IDs

stored in the memory.

3.Copy 1.Quality —Text

Photo

Auto*

You can choose the

Copy resolution for

your type of

document.

2.Brightness —b -nnnno+ a

b -nnnon+ a

b -nnonn+ a*

b -nonnn+ a

b -onnnn+ a

Adjust the brightness

for copies.

3.Contrast —b -nnnno+ a

b -nnnon+ a

b -nnonn+ a*

b -nonnn+ a

b -onnnn+ a

Adjusts the contrast

for copies.

You can change to

the higher Copy

resolution when you

make a text copy with

100% ratio using the

scanner glass.

Main Menu Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

206

3.Copy

(Continued)

4.Color Adjust 1.Red b -nnnno+ a

b -nnnon+ a

b -nnonn+ a*

b -nonnn+ a

b -onnnn+ a

Adjusts the red color

for copies.

2.Green b -nnnno+ a

b -nnnon+ a

b -nnonn+ a*

b -nonnn+ a

b -onnnn+ a

Adjusts the green

color for copies.

3.Blue b -nnnno+ a

b -nnnon+ a

b -nnonn+ a*

b -nonnn+ a

b -onnnn+ a

Adjusts the blue color

for copies.

4.Printer 1.Emulation —Auto*

HP LaserJet

BR-Script 3

Chooses the

emulation mode.

See

Software

User’s

Guide

on the

CD-ROM.

2.Print Options 1.

Internal Font

1.HP LaserJet Prints a list of the

machine’s internal

fonts.

2.BR-Script 3

Configuration

— Prints a list of the

machine’s printer

settings.

3.Test Print — Prints a test page.

3.Output Color —Auto*

Color

B&W

Chooses color or

black & white printed

documents. If you

choose Auto, the

machine selects a

suitable option for the

document (color or

B&W).

4.Reset Printer —1.Reset Restores the printer

settings to the original

factory default

settings.

2.Exit

5.Calibration —Calibrate

Reset

Adjusts the color

density or returns the

color calibration to the

factory settings.

167

Main Menu Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

Menu and features

207

4.Printer

(Continued)

6.Auto Regist. 1.Start Adjust the print

position of each color

automatically.

168

2.Exit

7.Manual Regist. 1.Print Chart — Print the chart to

manually check the

registration of the

colors.

168

2.Set Regist. 1 Magenta

2 Cyan

3 Yellow

4 Magenta

5 Cyan

6 Yellow

7 Magenta

8 Cyan

9 Yellow

Sets the correction

value on the chart you

printed from

Print Chart.

8.Drum Cleaning — — Carry out cleaning the

drum unit to improve

the print quality

problem.

162

9.Frequency —Normal*

Low

Off

Sets the interval time

you want to carry out

the auto registration

and the calibration.

168

USB Direct I/F

(MFC-9325CW

only)

1.Direct Print 1.Paper Size A4

Letter*

Legal

Executive

A5 L

Folio

Sets the paper size

when printing directly

from the USB flash

memory drive.

2.Media Type Thin

Plain*

Thick

Thicker

Recycled Paper

Sets the media type

when printing directly

from the USB flash

memory drive.

Main Menu Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

208

5.USB Direct

I/F

(MFC-9325CW

only)

(Continued)

1.Direct Print

(Continued)

Multiple Page

1in1*

2in1

4in1

9in1

16in1

25in1

1 in 2x2 pages

1 in 3x3 pages

1 in 4x4 pages

1 in 5x5 pages

Sets the page style

when printing multiple

pages directly from

the USB Flash

memory drive.

100

4.Orientation Portrait*

Landscape

Sets the page

orientation when

printing directly from

the USB Flash

memory drive.

100

5.Collate On*

Off

Enables or disables

the page collation

when printing directly

from the USB Flash

memory drive.

100

Print Quality

Normal*

Fine

Sets the print quality

option when printing

directly from the USB

Flash memory drive.

100

7.PDF Option Document*

Document&Marku

Document&Stamp

Sets the PDF option

whether to print

comments (Markup)

or stamps in the PDF

file along with the text.

100

8.Index Print Simple*

Details

Sets the index print

option, simple format

or details.

100

2.Scan to USB 1.Resolution Color 100 dpi*

Color 200 dpi

Color 300 dpi

Color 600 dpi

Gray 100 dpi

Gray 200 dpi

Gray 300 dpi

B&W 200 dpi

B&W 200x100 dp

Sets the resolution to

send the scanned

data to USB Flash

memory drive.

See

Software

User’s

Guide

on the

CD-ROM.

2.File Name — Enter the file name of

the scanned data.

Main Menu Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

Menu and features

209

5.USB Direct

I/F

(MFC-9325CW

only)

(Continued)

3.PictBridge 1.Paper Size Letter*

Sets the paper size

when printing data

from a camera with

using PictBridge.

2.Orientation Letter

Then, you will

choose

Portrait

Landscape

Sets the page

orientation when

printing data from a

camera using

PictBridge, If you

choose the paper size

Letter, A4, or B5,

Portrait will be

chosen. If you choose

A5, B6 or A6,

Landscape will be

chosen.

3.Date & Time On

Off*

Prints the date and

time the photo is

being taken on the

photo.

4.File Name On

Off*

Prints the file name of

the data on the photo.

Print Quality

Normal*

Fine

Sets the print quality

option when printing

data from a camera

using PictBridge.

Main Menu Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

210

Print Reports

(MFC-9325CW)

1.Transmission 1.View on LCD — You can view the

Transmission

Verification Report for

your last 200

outgoing faxes and

print the last report.

Print Report

—

2.Help List — — Prints the Help List so

you can see at-a-

glance how to quickly

program your

machine.

3.Tel Index List 1.Numeric — Lists names and

numbers stored in the

One Touch and

Speed Dial memory,

in numerical or

alphabetical order.

2.Alphabetic —

4.Fax Journal — — Lists information

about your last 200

incoming and

outgoing faxes. (TX

means Transmit. RX

means Receive.)

5.User Settings — — Lists your settings. 82

6.Network Config — — Lists your Network

settings.

Main Menu Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

Menu and features

211

Main

Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

Network

(MFC-9125CN)

1.TCP/IP 1.Boot Method Auto*

Static

RARP

BOOTP

DHCP

Chooses the BOOT

method that best

suits your needs.

See

Network

User’s

Guide

on the

CD-ROM.

2.IP Address [000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Enter the IP address.

3.Subnet Mask [000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Enter the Subnet

mask.

4.Gateway [000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Enter the Gateway

address.

5.Node Name BRNXXXXXXXXXXXX Enter the Node

name.

6.WINS Config Auto*

Static

Chooses the WINS

configuration mode.

7.WINS Server Primary

[000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Secondary

[000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Specifies the IP

address of the

primary or secondary

WINS server.

8.DNS Server Primary

[000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Secondary

[000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Specifies the IP

address of the

primary or secondary

DNS server.

9.APIPA On*

Off

Automatically

allocates the IP

address from the

link-local address

range.

0.IPv6 On

Off*

Enable or Disable the

IPv6 protocol. If you

want to use the IPv6

protocol, visit

http://solutions.

brother. com/ for

more information.

2.Ethernet —Auto*

100B-FD

100B-HD

10B-FD

10B-HD

Chooses the

Ethernet link mode.

212

Network

(MFC-9125CN)

(Continued)

3.Scan to

FTP

—Color 100 dpi*

Color 200 dpi

Color 300 dpi

Color 600 dpi

Gray 100 dpi

Gray 200 dpi

Gray 300 dpi

B&W 200 dpi

B&W 200x100 dpi

Chooses the file

format to send the

scanned data via

FTP.

See

Network

User’s

Guide

on the

CD-ROM.

4.Scan to

Network

—Color 100 dpi*

Color 200 dpi

Color 300 dpi

Color 600 dpi

Gray 100 dpi

Gray 200 dpi

Gray 300 dpi

B&W 200 dpi

B&W 200x100 dpi

You can scan a black

and white or color

document directly to

a CIFS server on

your local network or

on the internet.

Time Zone

—UTCXXX:XX Sets the time zone

for your country.

0.Network

Reset

1.Reset 1.Yes

2.No

Restore all network

settings to factory

default.

2.Exit —

Main

Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

Menu and features

213

Network

(MFC-9325CW)

Wired LAN

1.TCP/IP 1.

Boot Method

Auto*

Static

RARP

BOOTP

DHCP

Chooses the BOOT

method that best

suits your needs.

See

Network

User’s

Guide

on the

CD-ROM.

2.IP Address [000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Enter the IP address.

Subnet Mask

[000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Enter the Subnet

mask.

4.Gateway [000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Enter the Gateway

address.

5.Node Name BRNXXXXXXXXXXXX Enter the Node

name.

WINS Config

Auto*

Static

Chooses the WINS

configuration mode.

WINS Server

Primary

[000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Secondary

[000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Specifies the IP

address of the

primary or secondary

WINS server.

8.DNS Server Primary

[000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Secondary

[000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Specifies the IP

address of the

primary or secondary

DNS server.

9.APIPA On*

Off

Automatically

allocates the IP

address from the

link-local address

range.

0.IPv6 On

Off*

Enable or Disable the

IPv6 protocol. If you

want to use the IPv6

protocol, visit

http://solutions.

brother.com/ for

more information.

Main

Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

214

Network

(MFC-9325CW )

(Continued)

Wired LAN

(Continued)

2.Ethernet —Auto*

100B-FD

100B-HD

10B-FD

10B-HD

Chooses the

Ethernet link mode.

See

Network

User’s

Guide

on the

CD-ROM.

3.Set to De

fault

—1.Reset

2.Exit

Restore the wired

network setting to

factory default.

4.Wired Ena

ble

—On*

Off

Enable or Disable the

Wired LAN manually.

2.WLAN 1.TCP/IP 1.

Boot Method

Auto*

Static

RARP

BOOTP

DHCP

Chooses the BOOT

method that best

suits your needs.

2.IP Address [000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Enter the IP address.

Subnet Mask

[000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Enter the Subnet

mask.

4.Gateway [000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Enter the Gateway

address.

5.Node Name BRWXXXXXXXXXXXX Enter the Node

name.

WINS Config

Auto*

Static

Chooses the WINS

configuration mode.

WINS Server

Primary

[000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Secondary

[000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Specifies the IP

address of the

primary or secondary

WINS server.

8.DNS Server Primary

[000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Secondary

[000-255]. [000-255].

[000-255]. [000-255]

Specifies the IP

address of the

primary or secondary

DNS server.

Main

Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

Menu and features

215

Network

(MFC-9325CW )

(Continued)

2.WLAN

(Continued)

1.TCP/IP

(Continued)

9.APIPA On*

Off

Automatically

allocates the IP

address from the

link-local address

range.

See

Network

User’s

Guide

on the

CD-ROM.

0.IPv6 On

Off*

Enable or Disable the

IPv6 protocol. If you

want to use the IPv6

protocol, visit

http://solutions.

brother.com/ for

more information.

2.Setup Wiz

ard

1.On

2.Off

— You can configure

your print server.

3.SES/WPS/A

OSS

1.On

2.Off

— You can easily

configure your

wireless network

settings using the

one-button push

method.

4.WPS w/PIN

Code

1.On

2.Off

— You can easily

configure your

wireless network

settings using WPS

with a PIN code.

5.WLAN Stat

1.Status Active(11b)

Active(11g)

Wired LAN Active

WLAN OFF

AOSS Active

Connection Fail

You can see the

current wireless

network status.

2.Signal Strong

Medium

Weak

None

You can see the

current wireless

network signal

strength.

3.SSID — You can see the

current SSID.

4.Comm. Mode Ad-hoc

Infrastructure

You can see the

current

Communication

Mode.

Main

Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

216

Network

(MFC-9325CW)

(Continued)

2.WLAN

(Continued)

6.Set to De

fault

—1.Reset

2.Exit

Restore the wireless

network settings to

factory default.

See

Network

User’s

Guide

on the

CD-ROM.

WLAN Enable

—On

Off*

Enable or disable the

wireless LAN

manually.

3.Scan To

FTP

—— Color 100 dpi*

Color 200 dpi

Color 300 dpi

Color 600 dpi

Gray 100 dpi

Gray 200 dpi

Gray 300 dpi

B&W 200 dpi

B&W 200x100 dpi

Chooses the file

format to send the

scanned data via

FTP.

4.ScanTo N

etwork

—— Color 100 dpi*

Color 200 dpi

Color 300 dpi

Color 600 dpi

Gray 100 dpi

Gray 200 dpi

Gray 300 dpi

B&W 200 dpi

B&W 200x100 dpi

You can scan a black

and white or color

document directly to

a CIFS server on

your local network or

on the internet.

Time Zone

—— UTCXXX:XX Sets the time zone

for your country.

0.Network

Reset

1.Reset —1.Yes

2.No

Restores all network

settings to factory

default.

2.Exit ——

Main

Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

Menu and features

217

Main Menu Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

Machine Info.

(MFC-9325CW)

Machine Info.

(MFC-9125CN)

1.Serial No. — — You can check the

serial number of your

machine.

190

2.Page Counter —Total

Fax/List

Copy

You can check the

number of total

pages the machine

has printed during its

life.

190

3.Parts Life 1.Drum 1.Black(K)

2.Cyan(C)

3.Magenta(M)

4.Yellow(Y)

You can check the

percentage of a

machine part’s life

that remains

available.

191

2.Belt Unit —

3.PF Kit —

4.Fuser —

0.Initial Se

tup

1.Receive Mode —Fax Only*

Fax/Tel

External TAD

Manual

Chooses the receive

mode that best suits

your needs.

2.Date&Time — — Puts the date and

time on the LCD and

in headings of faxes

you send.

See

Quick

Setup

Guide.

3.Station ID —Fax:

Tel:

Name:

Sets your name and

fax number to appear

on each page you

fax.

4.Tone/Pulse

(in Canada)

—Tone*

Pulse

Chooses the dialing

mode.

4.Dial Tone

(in USA)

5.Dial Tone

(in Canada)

—Detection

No Detection*

You can shorten the

dial tone detect

pause.

143

5.Dial Prefix

(in USA)

6.Dial Prefix

(in Canada)

— — Sets a prefix number

that will always be

added before the fax

number every time

you dial.

218

Initial Setup

(Continued)

6.Reset

(in USA)

7.Reset

(in Canada)

1.Network 1.Reset

2.Exit

Restores all network

settings to factory

default.

191

Address & Fax

1.Reset

2.Exit

Restores all stored

phone numbers and

fax settings.

All Settings

1.Reset

2.Exit

Restores all the

machine settings to

factory default.

0.Local Language — (in USA)

English*

Español

(in Canada)

English*

Français

Allows you to change

the LCD language for

your country.

See

Quick

Setup

Guide.

Main Menu Submenu Menu Selections Options Descriptions Page

Menu and features

219

Entering text D

When setting certain menu selections, such as the Station ID, you will need to type text

characters. The dial pad keys have letters printed on them. The keys: 0, # and l do not have

printed letters because they are used for special characters.

Press the appropriate dial pad key the number of times shown in this reference table to access

the character you want.

For menu selections that do not allow lower case character selection, please use this reference

table.

Inserting spaces

To enter a space in a fax number, press c once between numbers. To enter a space in a name,

press c twice between characters.

Making corrections

If you entered a letter incorrectly and want to change it, press d to move the cursor to the incorrect

character, and then press Clear/Back.

Repeating letters

To enter a character on the same key as the previous character, press c to move the cursor right

before pressing the key again.

Press

Key

one

time

two

times

three

times

four

times

five

times

six

times

seven

times

eight

times

nine

times

1@. / 1@. / 1@

2abcABC2ab

3de fDEF3de

4gh iGHI 4gh

5jklJKL5jk

6mn oMNO6mn

7pqr sPQRS7

8tuvTUV8tu

9wxyzWXYZ9

Press Key one time two times three times four times five times

2ABC2A

3DEF3D

4GH I 4G

5JKL5J

6MNO6M

7PQRS7

8TUV8T

9WXYZ 9

220

Special characters and symbols

Press l, # or 0, then press d or c to move the cursor to the symbol or character you want. Press

OK to choose it. The symbols and characters below will appear depending on your menu

selection.

Press lfor (space) ! " # $ % & ’ ( ) l + , - . / m

Press #for : ; < = > ? @ [ ] ^ _ \ ~ ` | { }

Press 0for É À È Ê Î Ç Ë Ö 0

221

General E

1When making a copy from one sheet

Specifications E

Printer Type LED

Print Method Electrophotographic LED

Memory Capacity 64 MB

LCD (liquid crystal display) 16 characters  2 lines

Power Source 110 - 120 V AC 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption Peak: 1176 W

Copying: Average 480 W 1

Sleep: (MFC-9125CN) Average 11 W

(MFC-9325CW) Average 12 W

Standby: Average 75 W

Dimensions

Weight Without Drum/Toner Unit: 44.3 lb (20.1 kg)

Noise level Sound power

Operating (Printing): LWAd = 6.5 Bell (A)

Standby: LWAd = 4.8 Bell (A)

Sound pressure

Operating (Printing): LPAm = 53 dBA

Standby: LPAm = 30 dBA

16.9 in.

(428 mm)

19.3 in.

(491mm)

15.8 in.

(401 mm)

222

Temperature Operating: 50 F to 90.5 F (10 to 32.5 C)

Storage: 32 F to 104 F (0 to 40 C)

Humidity Operating: 20 to 80% (without condensation)

Storage: 10 to 90% (without condensation)

ADF (automatic document

feeder) Up to 35 pages (Staggered) 20 lb (80 g/m2)

Recommended Environment for Best Results:

Temperature: 68 F to 86 F (20 to 30 C)

Humidity: 50% to 70%

Paper: Xerox 4200 (20 lb/Letter)

Paper Tray 250 Sheets 20 lb (80 g/m2)

Specifications

223

Print media E

1For labels, we recommend removing printed pages from the output paper tray immediately after they exit the machine

to avoid the possibility of smudging.

2When using paper that is smaller than 4.1 x 5.8 in. (or A6 size) open the back cover (back output tray).

Paper Input Paper Tray

Paper Type: Thin Paper, Plain Paper or Recycled Paper

Paper Size: Letter, A4, B5(ISO), A5, A5 (Long Edge),

B6(ISO), A6, Executive, Legal and Folio

Paper Weight: 16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m2)

Maximum Paper Tray

Capacity: Up to 250 sheets of 20 lb (80 g/m2)

Plain Paper

Manual Feed Slot

Paper Type: Thin Paper, Plain Paper, Thick Paper,

Thicker Paper, Bond Paper, Recycled

Paper, Envelopes or Labels 1

Paper Size: Width: 3 to 8.66 in. (76.2 to 220 mm) 2

Length: 4.57 to 16 in.

(116.0 to 406.4 mm) 2

Paper Weight: 16 to 43 lb (60 to 163 g/m2)

Paper Output Up to 100 sheets (face down print delivery to the output paper tray)

224

Fax E

1‘Pages’ refers to the ‘Brother Standard Chart No. 1’ (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, JBIG code).

Specifications and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.

2‘Pages’ refers to the ‘ITU-T Test Chart #1’ (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, JBIG code). Specifications

and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.

3Black & White only

Compatibility ITU-T Super Group 3

Coding System MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG

Modem Speed Automatic Fallback: 33,600 bps

Document Size ADF Width: 5.8 to 8.5 in. (147.3 to 215.9 mm)

ADF Height: 5.8 to 14 in. (147.3 to 356.0 mm)

Scanner Glass Width: Max. 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)

Scanner Glass Length: Max. 11.7 in. (297 mm)

Scanning Width Max. 8.2 in. (208 mm)

Printing Width Max. 8.2 in. (208 mm)

Gray Scale 8 bit/256 levels

Polling Types Standard, Sequential

Contrast Control Automatic/Light/Dark (manual setting)

Resolution Horizontal: 203 dot/inch (8 dot/mm)

Vertical

Standard: 98 line/in. (3.85 line/mm)

Fine: 196 line/in. (7.7 line/mm)

Photo: 196 line/in. (7.7 line/mm)

Superfine: 392 line/in. (15.4 line/mm)

One Touch Dial 8 (4  2)

Speed Dial 200 stations

Groups Up to 20

Broadcasting 258 stations

Automatic Redial Yes,1 time after 5 minutes

Ring Delay 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 rings

Communication Source Public switched telephone network

Memory Transmission Up to 600 1/500 2 pages 3

Out of Paper Reception Up to 600 1/500 2 pages 3

Specifications

225

Copy E

1The copy speed may change depending on the type of document you copy.

Copy Speed (Monochrome) Up to 19 pages/minute (Letter size) 1

Copy Speed (Full Color) Up to 19 pages/minute (Letter size) 1

Color/Monochrome Yes/Yes

Document Size ADF Width: 5.8 to 8.5 in. (148 to 215.9 mm)

ADF Length: 5.8 to 14 in. (148 to 355.6 mm)

Scanner Glass Width: Max. 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)

Scanner Glass Length: Max. 11.7 in. (297 mm)

Copy Width Max. 8.26 in. (210 mm)

Multiple Copies Stacks or Sorts up to 99 pages

Reduce/Enlarge 25% to 400% (in increments of 1%)

Resolution Up to 600  600 dpi

First Copy Out Time

(Monochrome)

Less than 19 seconds (from Ready mode)

First Copy Out Time (Color) Less than 24 seconds (from Ready mode)

226

Scan E

1For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.

2Maximum 1200 1200 dpi scanning with the WIA driver in Windows® XP/Windows Vista®/Windows® 7 (resolution up

to 19200 19200 dpi can be chosen by using the scanner utility)

Color/Monochrome Yes/Yes

TWAIN Compliant Yes (Windows®XP/Windows®XP Professional x64 Edition/

Windows Vista®/Windows® 7)

Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5.x, 10.6.x 1

WIA Compliant Yes (Windows® XP/Windows Vista®/Windows® 7)

Color Depth 24 bit color

Resolution Up to 19200  19200 dpi (interpolated) 2

Up to 1200  2400 dpi (optical) (From Scanner Glass)

Up to 1200  600 dpi (optical) (From ADF)

Document Size ADF Width: 5.8 to 8.5 in. (148.0 to 215.9 mm)

ADF Length: 5.8 to 14 in. (148.0 to 355.6 mm)

Scanner Glass Width: Max. 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)

Scanner Glass Length: Max. 11.7 in. (297 mm)

Scanning Width Max. 8.26 in. (210 mm)

Gray Scale 256 levels

Specifications

227

Print E

1Print only via network.

2For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.

3The print speed may change depending on the type of document you print.

Emulations PCL6, BR-Script3 (PostScript®3™)

Printer Driver Host-Based Driver for Windows® XP/Windows® XP Professional x64

Edition/Windows Vista®/Windows® 7/Windows Server® 2003 1/

Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition 1/Windows Server® 2008 1/

Windows Server® 2008 R2 Edition 1

BR-Script3 (PPD file) for Windows® XP/Windows® XP Professional

x64 Edition/Windows Vista®/Windows® 7/Windows Server® 2003 1/

Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition 1/Windows Server® 2008 1/

Windows Server® 2008 R2 Edition 1

Macintosh Printer Driver for Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5.X, 10.6.X 2

BR-Script3 (PPD file) for Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5.X, 10.6.X 2

Resolution 600 dpi  600 dpi, 2400 dpi (600  2400)

Print Speed

(Monochrome) Up to 19 pages/minute (Letter size) 3

Print Speed (Color) Up to 19 pages/minute (Letter size) 3

First Print Out Time

(Monochrome)

Less than 15 seconds (from Ready mode and standard tray)

First Print Out Time

(Color)

Less than 16 seconds (from Ready mode and standard tray)

First Copy Out Time

(Monochrome)

Less than 19 seconds (from Ready mode and standard tray)

First Copy Out Time

(Color)

Less than 24 seconds (from Ready mode and standard tray)

228

Interfaces E

1Your machine has a Hi-Speed USB 2.0 interface. The machine can also be connected to a computer that has a

USB 1.1 interface.

2Third party USB ports are not supported.

3See Ethernet wired network on page 233 and the Network User's Guide on the CD-ROM for detailed network

specifications.

USB Use a USB 2.0 interface cable that is no longer than 6 feet (2.0 m). 12

LAN 3Use an Ethernet UTP cable category 5 or greater.

Wireless LAN

(MFC-9325CW)

Your machine supports IEEE 802.11b/g wireless communication with

your wireless LAN using Infrastructure mode or a wireless

Peer-to-Peer connection in Ad-hoc mode.

Specifications

229

PictBridge (MFC-9325CW) E

Compatibility Supports the Camera & Imaging Products Association PictBridge

standard CIPA-001. Visit http://www.cipa.jp/pictbridge/ for more

information.

Interface USB direct interface.

230

Direct Print feature (MFC-9325CW) E

1PDF data that includes a JBIG2 image file, a JPEG2000 image file or a transparency file is not supported.

Compatibility PDF version 1.7 1, JPEG, Exif + JPEG, PRN (created by Brother

printer driver), TIFF (scanned by all Brother MFC or DCP models),

PostScript®3™ (created by Brother BR-Script 3 printer driver), XPS

version 1.0.

Specifications

231

Computer requirements E

1Internet Explorer® 5.5 or greater.

2For WIA, 1200x1200 resolution. Brother Scanner Utility enables to enhance up to 19200 x 19200 dpi.

3Third party USB ports are not supported.

4PC Fax supports black and white only.

5PaperPort™ 11SE supports Microsoft® SP2 or higher for Windows® XP.

6MFC-9325CW only

For the latest driver updates, visit http://solutions.brother.com/.

All trademarks, brand and product names are property of their respective companies.

Minimum System Requirements and Supported PC Software Functions

Computer Platform &

Operating System

Version

Processor

Minimum Speed

Minimum

RAM

Recommended

RAM

Hard Disk Space

to install

Supported

Software

Functions

Supported

Interface

For

Drivers

For

Applications

Windows

Operating

System 1

Windows

Home

Windows

Professional

Intel® Pentium® II

or equivalent

128 MB 256 MB 150 MB 310 MB

Printing,

PC Fax

Scanning

USB,

10/100

Base Tx

(Ethernet),

Wireless

802.11 b/g

Windows

Professional

x64 Edition

64-bit (Intel®64 or

AMD64)

supported CPU

256 MB 512 MB

Windows

Vista®2

Intel

Pentium

4 or

equivalent 64

bit

(Intel

64 or AMD64)

supported CPU

512 MB 1 GB 500 MB 500 MB

Windows

Intel

Pentium

4 or

equivalent 64-bit

(Intel

64 or AMD64)

supported CPU

1GB

(32-bit)

2GB

(64-bit)

1GB

(32-bit)

2GB

(64-bit)

650 MB 1.2 GB

Windows

Server

2003

(print only via

network)

Intel

Pentium

III

or equivalent

256 MB 512 MB 50 MB N/A Printing

10/100

Base Tx

(Ethernet),

Wireless

802.11 b/g

Windows

Server

2003 x64

Edition (print

only via

network)

64-bit (Intel®64 or

AMD64)

supported CPU

Windows

Server

2008

(print only via

network)

Intel

Pentium

4 or

equivalent 64-bit

(Intel

64 or AMD64)

supported CPU

512 MB 2 GB

Windows

Server

2008

R2 (print only

via network)

bit (Intel

64 or

AMD64) supported

CPU

Macintosh

Operating

System

Mac OS X

10.4.11

10.5.x

PowerPC

G4/G5

Intel

Processor

512 MB 1 GB 80 MB 400 MB

Printing,

PC Fax

Send

Scanning

USB,

10/100

Base Tx

(Ethernet),

Wireless

802.11 b/g

Mac OS X

10.6.x

Intel

Processor

1 GB 2 GB

232

Consumable items E

1Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

2Contains 4 pc. Drum Set

3Contains 1 pc. Black Drum Unit

4Contains 1 pc. Color Drum Unit

5Drum yield is approximate, and may vary by type of use.

Toner Cartridge Life Starter Toner Cartridge: Approx. 1,000 pages

(Letter) 1

Standard Toner Cartridge:

TN-210BK (Black): Approx. 2,200 pages

(Letter) 1

TN-210C (Cyan): Approx. 1,400 pages

(Letter) 1

TN-210M (Magenta): Approx. 1,400 pages

(Letter) 1

TN-210Y (Yellow): Approx. 1,400 pages

(Letter) 1

Drum Unit DR-210CL 2, DR-210CL-BK 3,

DR-210CL-CMY 4

Approx. 15,000 pages

(Letter) 5

Belt Unit BU-200CL Approx. 50,000 pages

(Letter)

Waste Toner Box WT-200CL Approx. 50,000 pages

Specifications

233

Ethernet wired network E

Network board

model name

NC-6700h

LAN You can connect your machine to a network for Network Printing,

Network Scanning, PC Fax and Remote Setup. 12

Support for Windows® XP, Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition,

Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows Server® 2003 2,

Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition 2, Windows Server® 2008 2,

Windows Server® 2008 R2 Edition 2

Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5.X, 10.6.X 3

Protocols IPv4: ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA (Auto IP),

WINS/NetBIOS name resolution, DNS Resolver,

mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD,

Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS,

FTP Client and Server, TELNET Server,

HTTP/HTTPS Server, SSL/TLS,

TFTP Client and Server, SMTP Client, APOP,

POP before SMTP, SMTP-AUTH, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,

ICMP, LLTD responder,

Web Services Print, CIFS Client, SNTP

IPv6: (Turned off as default) NDP, RA, DNS resolver,

mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD,

Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS,

FTP Client and Server, TELNET Server,

HTTP/HTTPS server, SSL/TLS,

TFTP Client and Server, SMTP Client, APOP,

POP before SMTP, SMTP-AUTH, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,

ICMPv6, LLTD responder, Web Services Print,

CIFS Client, SNTP

Network type Ethernet 10/100 BASE-TX Auto Negotiation (Wired LAN)

234

1PC Fax Send for Mac

2Print only via network.

3For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.

4BRAdmin Professional and Web BRAdmin are available as a download from http://solutions.brother.com/.

Management

utilities 4BRAdmin Light for Windows® XP, Windows® XP Professional x64

Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows Server® 2003,

Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server® 2008,

Windows Server® 2008 R2 Edition and Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5.X,

10.6.X 3

BRAdmin Professional for Windows® XP, Windows® XP Professional

x64 Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows Server® 2003,

Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server® 2008 and

Windows Server® 2008 R2 Edition

Web BRAdmin for Windows® XP, Windows® XP Professional x64

Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows Server® 2003,

Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server® 2008 and

Windows Server® 2008 R2 Edition

Client computers with a web browser supporting Java.

Specifications

235

Ethernet wireless network (MFC-9325CW) E

Network board

model name

NC-7500W

LAN You can connect your machine to a network for Network Printing,

Network Scanning, PC Fax and Remote Setup 12

Support for Windows® XP, Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition,

Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows Server® 2003,

Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server® 2008,

Windows Server® 2008 x64 Edition and Windows Server® 2008 R2

Edition

Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5.X, 10.6.X 3

Protocols IPv4: ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA (Auto IP),

WINS, NetBIOS name resolution, DNS Resolver,

mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD,

Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS,

FTP Client and Server, TELNET Server,

HTTP/HTTPS Server, SSL/TLS,

TFTP Client and Server, SMTP Client, APOP,

POP before SMTP, SMTP AUTH, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,

ICMP, LLTD responder,

Web Services Print, CIFS Client, SNTP

IPv6: (Turned off as default) NDP, RA, DNS resolver,

mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD,

Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS,

FTP Client and Server, TELNET Server,

HTTP/HTTPS server, SSL/TLS,

TFTP Client and Server, SMTP Client, APOP,

POP before SMTP, SMTP AUTH, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,

ICMPv6, LLTD responder,

Web Services Print, CIFS Client, SNTP

Network type IEEE 802.11 b/g (Wireless LAN)

236

1PC Fax Send for Mac

2Only printing for Windows Server® 2003 and Windows Server® 2008

3For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.

4BRAdmin Professional and Web BRAdmin are available as a download from http://solutions.brother.com/.

Management

utilities 4BRAdmin Light for Windows® XP, Windows® XP Professional x64

Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows Server® 2003,

Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server® 2008,

Windows Server® 2008 R2 Edition and Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5.X,

10.6.X 3

BRAdmin Professional for Windows® XP, Windows® XP Professional

x64 Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows Server® 2003,

Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server® 2008 and

Windows Server® 2008 R2 Edition

Web BRAdmin for Windows® XP, Windows® XP Professional x64

Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows Server® 2003,

Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server® 2008 and

Windows Server® 2008 R2 Edition

Client computers with a web browser supporting Java.

Specifications

237

Authentication and encryption for wireless users only E

Authentication method E

The Brother machine supports the following methods:

Open system

Wireless devices are allowed to access the network without any authentication.

Shared key

A secret pre-determined key is shared by all devices that will access the wireless network. The

Brother machine uses the WEP keys as the pre-determined key.

WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK

Enables a Wi-Fi Protected Access Pre-Shared Key (WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK), which enables

the Brother wireless machine to associate with access points using TKIP for WPA-PSK or AES

for WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK (WPA-Personal).

LEAP

Cisco LEAP (Light Extensible Authentication Protocol) has been developed by Cisco Systems,

Inc. and enables the Brother wireless product to associate with access points using CKIP

encryptions.

EAP-FAST

EAP-FAST (Extensible Authentication Protocol - Flexible Authentication via Secured Tunnel)

has been developed by Cisco Systems, Inc. which uses user ID and password for

authentication, and symmetric key algorithms to achieve a tunneled authentication process.

The Brother machine supports the following inner authentications:

• EAP-FAST/NONE

MS-CHAPv2 is used for Provisioning, and the method of EAP-FAST corresponding to

second phase authentication method.

• EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2

Method of EAP-FAST corresponding to CCXv4 that uses MS-CHAPv2 for inner method.

• EAP-FAST/GTC

Method of EAP-FAST corresponding to CCXv4 that uses GTC for inner method.

238

Encryption methods E

Encryption is used to secure the data that is sent over the wireless network. The Brother machine

supports the following encryption methods:

WEP

By using WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy), the data is transmitted and received with a secure

key.

TKIP

TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) provides per-packet key mixing a message integrity

check and re-keying mechanism.

AES

AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is Wi-Fi authorized strong encryption standard.

CKIP

The original Key Integrity Protocol for LEAP by Cisco Systems, Inc.

Network key E

There are some rules for each security method:

Open system/Shared key with WEP

This key is a 64-bit or 128-bit value that must be entered in an ASCII or hexadecimal format.

• 64 (40) bit ASCII:

Uses 5 text characters. e.g.“WSLAN” (this is case sensitive).

• 64 (40) bit hexadecimal:

Uses 10 digits of hexadecimal data. e.g.“71f2234aba”.

• 128 (104) bit ASCII:

Uses 13 text characters. e.g.“Wirelesscomms” (this is case sensitive).

• 128 (104) bit hexadecimal:

Uses 26 digits of hexadecimal data. e.g.“71f2234ab56cd709e5412aa2ba”.

WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK and TKIP or AES

Uses a Pre-Shared Key (PSK) that is 8 or more characters in length, up to a maximum of

63 characters.

LEAP

Uses User ID and Password.

• User ID: less than 64 characters in length.

• Password: less than 32 characters in length.

EAP-FAST

Uses User ID and Password.

• User ID: less than 64 characters in length.

• Password: less than 32 characters in length.

Specifications

239

Wireless one-push configuration E

If your wireless access point supports either Wi-Fi Protected Setup (PBC 1) or AOSS™, you can

configure the machine easily without a computer. By pushing a button on the wireless LAN router

/ access point and using the menu on the machine, you can set up the wireless network and

security settings. See the User’s Guide for your wireless LAN router / access point for instructions

on how to access one-push mode.

1Push Button Configuration

Note

Routers or access points that support Wi-Fi Protected Setup or AOSS™ have the symbols

shown below.

240

This is a comprehensive list of features and terms that appear in Brother manuals. Availability of

these features depends on the model you purchased.

Glossary F

ADF (automatic document feeder)

The document can be placed in the ADF

and scanned one page at a time

automatically.

Address Book ( )

A pre-programmed number for easy

dialing. You must press

(Address Book), then enter the three-

digit Speed Dial location and press Start

to begin the dialing process.

Auto Reduction

Reduces the size of incoming faxes.

Automatic fax transmission

Sending a fax without picking up the

handset of the external telephone or

pressing Hook.

Automatic Redial

A feature that enables your machine to

redial the last fax number after five

minutes if the fax did not go through

because the line was busy.

Backup Print

Your machine prints a copy of every fax

that is received and stored in memory.

This is a safety feature so you will not lose

messages during a power failure.

Batch Transmission

As a cost saving feature, all delayed faxes

to the same fax number will be sent as one

transmission.

Beeper Volume

Volume setting for the beep when you

press a key or make an error.

Broadcasting

The ability to send the same fax message

to more than one location.

Cancel Job

Cancels a programmed print job and

clears the machine’s memory.

CNG tones

The special tones (beeps) sent by fax

machines during automatic transmission

to tell the receiving machine that a fax

machine is calling.

Coding method

Method of coding the information

contained in the document. All fax

machines must use a minimum standard

of Modified Huffman (MH). Your machine

is capable of greater compression

methods, Modified Read (MR), Modified

Modified Read (MMR) and JBIG, if the

receiving machine has the same

capability.

Communication error (or Comm. Error)

An error during fax sending or receiving,

usually caused by line noise or static.

Compatibility group

The ability of one fax unit to communicate

with another. Compatibility is assured

between ITU-T Groups.

Contrast

Setting to compensate for dark or light

documents, by making faxes or copies of

dark documents lighter and light

documents darker.

Delayed Fax

Sends your fax at a specified later time

that day.

Glossary

241

Distinctive Ring

A subscriber service purchased from the

telephone company that gives you

another telephone number on an existing

telephone line. The Brother machine uses

the new number to simulate a dedicated

fax line.

Dual Access

Your machine can scan outgoing faxes or

scheduled jobs into memory at the same

time it is sending a fax or receiving or

printing an incoming fax.

Easy Receive

Enables your machine to respond to CNG

tones if you interrupt a fax call by

answering it.

ECM (Error Correction Mode)

Detects errors during fax transmission

and resends the pages of the fax that had

an error.

Extension telephone

A telephone on the fax number that is

plugged into a separate telephone wall

jack.

External telephone

A telephone that is plugged into the EXT

jack of your machine.

F/T Ring Time

The length of time that the Brother

machine pseudo/double-rings (when the

Receive Mode setting is Fax/Tel) to notify

you to pick up a voice call that it answered.

Fax Forwarding

Sends a fax received into the memory to

another pre-programmed fax number.

Fax Journal

Lists information about the last

200 incoming and outgoing faxes. TX

means Transmit. RX means Receive.

Fax Receive Code

Press this code (l51) when you answer a

fax call on an extension or external

telephone.

Fax Storage

You can store faxes in the memory.

Fax tones

The signals sent by sending and receiving

fax machines while communicating

information.

Fax/Tel

You can receive faxes and telephone

calls. Do not use this mode if you are

using a telephone answering device

(TAD).

Fine resolution

Resolution is 203  196 dpi. It is used for

small print and graphs.

Gray Scale

The shades of gray available for copying

and faxing photographs.

Group number

A combination of One Touch and

Speed Dial numbers that are stored on a

One Touch key or in a Speed Dial location

for Broadcasting.

Help List

A printout of the complete Menu table that

you can use to program your machine

when you do not have the User’s Guide

with you.

Journal Period

The pre-programmed time period

between automatically printed Fax

Journal Reports. You can print the Fax

Journal on demand without interrupting

the cycle.

LCD (liquid crystal display)

The display screen on the machine that

shows interactive messages during

On-Screen Programming and shows the

date and time when the machine is idle.

Manual fax

When you lift the handset of your external

telephone or press Hook so you can hear

the receiving fax machine answer before

you press Start to begin transmission.

242

Menu mode

Programming mode for changing your

machine’s settings.

OCR (optical character recognition)

The bundled ScanSoft™

PaperPort™ 11SE with OCR or Presto!

PageManager software application

converts an image of text to text you can

edit.

One Touch

Keys on the machine’s control panel

where you can store numbers for easy

dialing. You can store a second number

on each key if you press Shift and the

One Touch key together.

Out of Paper Reception

Receives faxes into the machine’s

memory when the machine is out of paper.

Overseas Mode

Makes temporary changes to the fax

tones to accommodate noise and static on

overseas telephone lines.

Paging

This feature enables your machine to call

your pager when a fax is received into its

memory.

Pause

Allows you to place a 3.5 second delay in

the dialing sequence while you are dialing

using the dial pad or while you are storing

One Touch and Speed Dial numbers.

Press Redial/Pause as many times as

needed for longer pauses.

Polling

The process of a fax machine calling

another fax machine to retrieve waiting fax

messages.

Pulse (Canada only)

A form of rotary dialing on a telephone

line.

Real Time Transmission

When memory is full, you can send faxes

in real time.

Remaining Jobs

You can check which programmed fax

jobs are waiting in the memory and cancel

the jobs individually.

Remote Access Code

Your own four-digit code (– – –l) that

allows you to call and access your

machine from a remote location.

Remote Retrieval Access

The ability to access your machine

remotely from a touch tone telephone.

Resolution

The number of vertical and horizontal lines

per inch.

Ring Delay

The number of rings before the machine

answers in Fax Only and Fax/Tel

modes.

Ring Volume

Volume setting for the machine’s ring.

Scanning

The process of sending an electronic

image of a paper document into your

computer.

An electronic, alphabetical listing of stored

One Touch, Speed Dial and Group

numbers.

Station ID

The stored information that appears on

the top of faxed pages. It includes the

sender’s name and fax number.

TAD (telephone answering device)

You can connect an external device or

answering machine to the EXT. jack of

your machine.

Telephone Answer Code

(Fax/Tel mode only)

When the machine answers a voice call, it

pseudo/double-rings. You can pick up at

an extension telephone by pressing this

code (#51).

Glossary

243

Tel Index List

A listing of names and numbers stored in

One Touch and Speed Dial memory, in

numerical order.

Temporary settings

You can choose certain options for each

fax transmission and copy without

changing the default settings.

Tone

A form of dialing on the telephone line

used for Touch Tone telephones.

Transmission

The process of sending faxes over the

telephone lines from your machine to the

receiving fax machine.

Transmission Verification Report

A report for each transmission, that shows

its date, time and number.

User Settings List

A printed report that shows the current

settings of the machine.

Index

244

Accessories and supplies .......................... ii

Address book ................................8, 63, 64

ADF (automatic document feeder)

faxing ....................................................38

using .....................................................23

Answering machine (TAD)

connecting .............................................58

Apple Macintosh

See Software User’s Guide on the

CD-ROM.

Automatic

fax receive .............................................48

easy receive .......................................50

fax redial ...............................................64

Belt unit

replacing .............................................181

Broadcasting ............................................39

canceling ...............................................40

setting up groups for .............................69

Brother

accessories and supplies ........................ ii

Brother numbers ......................................i

Customer Service ....................................i

FAQs (frequently asked questions) ..........i

product support ........................................i

service centers .........................................i

warranties .................................... iii, iv, vi

Canceling

broadcast in process .............................40

fax jobs in memory ................................45

fax storage ............................................73

jobs awaiting redial ...............................45

remote fax options ................................75

Cleaning

corona wires ........................................160

drum unit .............................................162

LED head ............................................159

scanner ...............................................158

Connecting

external TAD (answering machine) ...... 57

external telephone ................................ 61

two-line external TAD or telephone ...... 59

Consumable items .........................169, 170

Control panel overview .............................. 6

ControlCenter2 (for Macintosh)

See Software User’s Guide on the

CD-ROM.

ControlCenter3 (for Windows®)

See Software User’s Guide on the

CD-ROM.

Copy

contrast ...........................................86, 89

Enlarge/Reduce key ............................. 87

enter copy mode ................................... 86

keys ..................................................8, 87

multiple ................................................. 86

N in 1 (page layout) .............................. 91

Options key .......................................... 88

out of memory ...................................... 92

quality ................................................... 89

single .................................................... 86

sort (ADF only) ..................................... 89

temporary settings ................................ 87

using ADF .......................................89, 91

using scanner glass ........................91, 92

Cordless telephone (non-Brother) ........... 61

Corona wires ......................................... 161

Cover page .............................................. 41

custom comments ................................ 41

for all faxes ........................................... 42

for next fax only .................................... 41

printed form .......................................... 42

Custom Ringing ....................................... 54

245

Data Ident-A-Call .....................................54

Delayed batch transmission .....................44

Dialing

a pause .................................................64

access codes and credit card numbers 71

automatic fax redial ...............................64

dial prefix ..............................................28

groups (broadcasting) ...........................39

manual ..................................................63

one touch ..............................................63

restricting dialing ...................................35

speed dial .............................................63

using the Search key ............................64

Direct print ................................................99

Direct key ............................................100

specification ........................................230

Distinctive ring ..........................................54

choosing ring pattern ............................55

setting ring pattern ................................55

turning off ..............................................56

Document

how to load .................................... 23, 24

jam ......................................................151

Drum unit

checking (remaining life) .....................191

cleaning ..................................... 160, 162

Dual access .............................................43

EAP-FAST .............................................237

Enlarge/Reduce key .................................87

Envelopes .............................14, 18, 19, 21

Labels ...................................................14

Equalization ...........................................143

Error messages on LCD ........................144

Comm. Error .......................................145

Init Unable XX .....................................146

No Paper .............................................146

Out of Memory ....................................147

Print Unable XX ..................................147

Scan Unable XX .................................149

Extension telephone, using ......................61

External telephone, connecting ................61

Fax codes

changing ......................................... 62, 76

fax receive code ................................... 61

remote access code ............................. 76

telephone answer code ........................ 61

Fax forwarding

changing remotely .......................... 77, 78

programming a number ........................ 72

Fax storage ............................................. 73

printing from memory ........................... 52

turning off ............................................. 75

turning on ............................................. 73

Fax, stand-alone

receiving ............................................... 46

at end of conversation ....................... 51

easy receive ...................................... 50

fax forwarding .................................... 78

fax receive stamp .............................. 51

from extension telephone .................. 61

into memory (fax storage) ................. 73

paging ............................................... 73

polling receive ................................... 79

reducing to fit on paper ..................... 51

retrieving from a remote site ....... 77, 78

ring delay, setting .............................. 49

sequential polling .............................. 79

telephone line interference .............. 143

sending ................................................. 38

at end of conversation ....................... 45

broadcasting ...................................... 39

canceling from memory ..................... 45

contrast ............................................. 42

delayed batch .................................... 44

delayed fax ........................................ 44

from ADF ........................................... 38

from memory (dual access) ............... 43

from scanner glass ............................ 38

manual .............................................. 45

overseas ............................................ 44

polled transmit ................................... 80

real time transmission ....................... 43

resolution ........................................... 42

telephone line interference .............. 143

Fax/Tel mode

answering at extension telephones ...... 61

easy receive ......................................... 50

F/T ring time (double-ring) .................... 49

246

fax receive code ....................................61

receiving faxes ......................................61

ring delay ..............................................49

telephone answer code .........................61

Folio .................................................. 19, 25

Gray scale ..................................... 224, 226

Groups for broadcasting ..........................69

HELP ........................................................83

Help List ................................................83

LCD messages ...................................197

Menu Table ................................ 197, 199

using menu keys .................................197

Hook key ............................................. 8, 61

Ident-A-Call ..............................................54

Ident-A-Ring .............................................54

Jacks

convert to RJ11 jack

triplex adapter ....................................59

EXT

external telephone .............................61

TAD (answering machine) .................57

Jams

document ............................................151

paper ...................................................152

Labels ............................ 13, 14, 18, 19, 22

LCD (liquid crystal display) ............... 8, 197

contrast .................................................28

Help List ................................................82

Machine information

checking remaining life of parts .......... 191

page counts ........................................ 190

status LED ............................................ 10

Macintosh

See Software User’s Guide on the

CD-ROM.

Maintenance, routine ............................. 157

checking the remaining life of parts .... 191

replacing

belt unit ............................................ 181

drum units ....................................... 176

toner cartridge ................................. 171

waste toner box ............................... 185

Manual

dialing ................................................... 63

receive ............................................46, 48

transmission ......................................... 45

Memory

adding DIMM (option) ......................... 126

installing .......................................... 126

storage ............................................... 197

Menu Table ...................................197, 199

using menu keys ................................ 197

Mode, entering

copy ...................................................... 86

fax ......................................................... 38

scan ........................................................ 9

Multi-line connections (PBX) ................... 60

N in 1 (page layout) ................................. 91

Network

faxing

See Software User’s Guide on the

CD-ROM.

printing

See Network User’s Guide on the

CD-ROM.

scanning

See Software User’s Guide on the

CD-ROM.

247

One touch

changing ...............................................68

setting up ..............................................65

using .....................................................63

Out of Memory message ... 45, 92, 98, 103,

147

Packing and shipping the machine ........192

Page layout (N in 1) .................................91

Paging ......................................................73

programming your cell number .............73

programming your pager number .........72

Paper .............................................. 18, 223

how to load ...........................................11

in manual feed slot .............................13

in paper tray .......................................11

jam ......................................................152

recommended ................................ 18, 19

size ................................................ 18, 25

size of document ........................ 225, 226

tray capacity ..........................................19

type ................................................ 18, 25

PaperPort™ 11SE with OCR

See Software User’s Guide on the

CD-ROM and Help in the PaperPort™

11SE application to access How-to-Guides

PC Fax

See Software User’s Guide on the

CD-ROM.

Personalized Ring ....................................54

PictBridge

DPOF printing .......................................96

specification ........................................229

Polling

polled transmit ......................................80

polling receive .......................................79

sequential polling ..................................79

Power failure ..........................................197

difficulties ................................... 128, 132

drivers .................................................227

fax from memory ...................................52

paper jams ..........................................152

quality ........................................ 134, 136

reports ...................................................82

resolution ............................................ 227

specifications ...................................... 227

Printing

See Software User’s Guide on the

CD-ROM.

Programming your machine .................. 197

Quality

copying ........................................... 88, 89

printing .......................................134, 136

Quick dial ................................................. 65

access codes and credit card numbers 71

broadcasting ......................................... 39

using groups ...................................... 39

group dial

changing ............................................ 68

setting up groups for broadcasting .... 69

one touch dial

changing ............................................ 68

custom scan profile ........................... 65

setting up ........................................... 65

using .................................................. 63

search .................................................. 64

speed dial

changing ............................................ 68

custom scan profile ........................... 66

setting up ........................................... 66

using .................................................. 63

248

Redial/Pause key .............................. 64, 71

Reducing

copies ....................................................87

incoming faxes ......................................51

Remote retrieval .......................................76

access code ..........................................76

commands ............................................78

getting your faxes ..................................77

Remote setup

See Software User’s Guide on the

CD-ROM.

Replacing

belt unit ...............................................181

drum units ...........................................176

toner cartridge .....................................171

waste toner box ...................................185

Reports ............................................. 81, 82

Fax Journal ...........................................82

journal period .....................................82

Help List ................................................82

how to print ...........................................83

Network Configuration ..........................82

Tel Index List .........................................82

Transmission Verification ......................81

User Settings ........................................82

Resolution

copy ....................................................225

fax (standard, fine, superfine, photo)

.. 42, 224

print .....................................................227

scan ....................................................226

setting for next fax .................................42

Resolution key .................................... 8, 42

Restricted users .......................................31

Ring delay, setting ...................................49

RingMaster ...............................................54

Safety instructions ................................. 117

Scanner glass

faxing .................................................... 38

using ..................................................... 24

Scanning

See Software User’s Guide on the

CD-ROM.

Secure key ................................................ 8

Security

Memory Security .................................. 32

restricting dialing .................................. 35

Secure function lock

administrator password ..................... 29

Public user mode .............................. 30

restricted users .................................. 31

Setting lock ........................................... 34

Serial number

how to find ...............See inside front cover

Service centers ............................................i

Shipping the machine ............................ 192

SimpleBiz Fax & Alternate Number Ringing

... 54

Sleep time ............................................... 27

Smart Ring .............................................. 54

Sort .......................................................... 89

Speed dial

changing ............................................... 68

setting up .............................................. 66

using ..................................................... 63

Status LED .............................................. 10

249

TAD (telephone answering device),

external .......................................46, 48, 59

connecting ..................................... 57, 58

recording OGM .....................................58

with two-line jack ...................................59

Teen Ring ................................................54

Telephone line

connections ...........................................58

coverting wall outlets ............................59

difficulties ............................................129

interference .........................................143

multi-line (PBX) .....................................60

roll over lines .........................................59

two-line telephone system ....................59

Temporary copy settings ..........................87

Text, entering .........................................219

Toner Save ..............................................27

Troubleshooting .....................................128

document jam .....................................151

error messages on LCD ......................144

if you are having difficulty

copy quality ......................................132

incoming calls ..................................131

network ............................................134

paper handling .................................133

print quality ............................. 134, 136

printing .................................... 128, 132

receiving faxes .................................129

scanning ..........................................133

sending faxes ...................................131

software ...........................................133

telephone line ..................................143

maintenance messages on LCD .........144

paper jam ............................................152

Two-line telephone system ......................59

Voice Mail ................................................53

VoIP

interference/VoIP ................................143

Volume, setting

beeper ...................................................26

ring ........................................................26

speaker .................................................26

Warranties

Canada ...................................................vi

Notice-Disclaimer ................................... iii

USA ........................................................iv

Waste toner box

replacing ............................................. 185

Windows®

See Software User’s Guide on the

CD-ROM.

Wireless Network

See Quick Setup Guide and Network

User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.

World Wide Web .........................................i

EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT LIMITATIONS

(Canada only)

NOTICE

This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.

NOTICE

The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to

be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any

combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices

does not exceed five.

Brother International Corporation

100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard

P.O. Box 6911

Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA

Brother International Corporation (Canada) Ltd.

1 rue Hôtel de Ville,

Dollard-des-Ormeaux, QC, Canada H9B 3H6

Visit us on the World Wide Web

http://www.brother.com/

These machines are made for use in the USA and Canada only. We cannot recommend using

them overseas because it may violate the Telecommunications Regulations of that country and

the power requirements of your machine may not be compatible with the power available in foreign

countries. Using USA or Canada models overseas is at your own risk and may void your

warranty.

Brother Mfc 9325Cw Owner S Manual

Brother-Mfc-9125Cn-Owner-S-Manual brother-mfc-9125cn-owner-s-manual

MFC-9325CW en-US%5CMFC%5CConsumer%5CUsersManual%5CUM_MFC_9125CN_9325CW_EN_5693

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation